JP2022086756A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of realizing an appropriate evaluation of a game performance.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine is configured so as not to measure a base value with putout of prize balls for those not put out until a prize ball error is resolved as an opportunity when the prize ball error occurs during execution of putout of prize balls with entry of game balls into a large winning hole during execution of a special game as an opportunity, and the prize ball error is resolved in a normal ball entry state to be started after completion of an easy-ball-entry state to be started after completion of the special game and hence prize balls for those not put out during execution of the special game are put out after resolving the prize ball error in the normal ball entry state, and so as to perform measurement of the total number of outs on the basis of discharge of game balls based on entry of the game balls into the large winning hole during execution of the special game for triggering occurrence of prize balls for those not put out until the prize ball error is resolved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 90

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number value for lottery when a gaming ball enters the starting port, and temporarily stores the random value up to a predetermined upper limit as an operation pending ball. Each such operation-holding ball is sequentially digested one by one each time a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a hit / fail determination as to whether or not it corresponds to a big hit is executed. If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the decorative symbol consisting of multiple rows is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is opened. A special game (big hit game) that is in a state is established.

It is known that this type of pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a performance display device that displays the performance information of the game obtained by measuring the number of game balls discharged from the game area and the number of prize balls given to the player. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-186936

A pachinko gaming machine that adopts such a configuration already exists as a conventional model, and there is room for further improvement in order to realize an appropriate evaluation of gaming performance.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of realizing an appropriate evaluation of gaming performance.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a game board on which a game area is formed and a first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and into which a game ball can enter. To the second starting port, which is provided at a position different from the first starting port of the game area, and the game ball changes into an open state where the ball is easy to enter and a closed state where the ball is difficult to enter, and the first starting port. The first hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail determination triggered by the entry of the game ball, the second hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port, and the game. A large winning opening provided in the area, which is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means, and the first hit / fail can be entered. When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / fail judgment means is a big hit, the special game execution means capable of executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the normal ball entry state. , It has an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the second starting port is higher than that of the normal entry state, and it is possible to set the normal entry state or the easy entry state. A state control means, a performance display device for displaying specific information, and an effect display device for displaying an effect display are provided, and a game ball discharged from the game area can be detected, and in all game states. The first counting process for counting the total number of discharged balls, which is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area in the normal entering state under a predetermined situation. It is possible to execute a second counting process for counting the number of balls ejected at the time and a third counting process for counting the number of prize balls during normal times, which is the total number of prize balls paid out in the normal ball entry state under a predetermined situation. It is possible to measure a base value indicating the ratio of the number of prize balls in the normal time to the number of balls discharged in the normal time, and the performance display device includes a base value information display unit that displays base value information capable of specifying the base value. It has an identification information display unit for displaying identification information for identifying the type of base value information displayed on the base value information display unit, and a game ball is sent to the large winning opening during a special game. The cumulative number of prize balls, which is a display showing the cumulative value of the number of prize balls given to the player, can be updated and displayed when the player enters the ball. Can display a specific value corresponding display indicating that the cumulative value of the number of prize balls has reached the specific value separately from the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. Therefore, a predetermined error occurs in which the payout of the prize ball is temporarily suspended while the payout of the prize ball is being performed when the game ball enters the large winning opening during the execution of the special game. However, if the predetermined error continues until the normal ball entry state that shifts after the end of the easy ball entry state that shifts after the end of the special game, and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball entry state. The prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the special game due to the occurrence of the predetermined error can be paid out after the predetermined error is resolved in the normal entry state, while the special game The above-mentioned predetermined error occurs while the prize ball is being paid out when the game ball enters the large winning opening during execution, and the ball entry easy state shifts to after the end of the special game. If the predetermined error continues until the normal ball entry state that shifts after the end of the above, and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball entry state, the special game is executed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error. Even if there are prize balls that have not been paid out, the cumulative prize ball number display can be updated and displayed during the execution of the special game and after the predetermined error occurs, and the specific value correspondence display is also available. It can be displayed, and the predetermined error occurs while the prize ball is being paid out when the game ball enters the large winning opening during the execution of the special game, and the special game The predetermined error continues until the normal ball entry state that shifts after the end of the easy ball entry state that shifts after the end, and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball entry state, so that the predetermined error occurs. If the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the special game due to the occurrence are paid out after the predetermined error is resolved in the normal entry state, until the predetermined error is resolved. The base value is not measured with the payout of the prize balls that were not paid out, but it is the trigger for the generation of the prize balls that were not paid out until the predetermined error was resolved. It is characterized in that the total number of ejected balls can be counted with the ejection of the gaming ball based on the entry of the gaming ball into the large winning opening during the execution of the special game.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to realize an appropriate evaluation of gaming performance.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the staging control board of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / failing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol attribute of a decorative symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between the big hit type, the big hit symbol combination of a decorative symbol, and the big hit medium effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the super longevity jackpot production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Kotobuki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Kotobuki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Ki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Ki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen during a round game. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the composition of a prize-related production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the over prize production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the large prize opening count-up production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the bonus prize-winning production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the general winning opening count-up effect. It is a time chart used to explain the priority of the big prize opening count-up production. It is a schematic diagram used for the explanation of the emphasis staging. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the error type of a gaming machine. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over-winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the detection state of a touch sensor, an over winning effect, and a general winning effect. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the volume adjustment screen. This is a time chart used to explain the overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect. It is a time chart when over-winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters a general prize opening. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 35 of the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 47 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the staging control side. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning effect content determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the staging control side. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows schematically the special symbol winning / failing lottery table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol jackpot symbol table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the ordinary symbol lottery of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the main control display device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the emphasis effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the emphasis effect pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the emphasis effect, the special effect display, and the output of a specific sound effect during the execution of the jackpot game of the third embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect of 3rd Embodiment, and the execution time of the big hit end demo. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the enhancement effect, the light emission effect, and the accessory effect of the third embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the variable middle character effect of the third embodiment, and (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the big hit middle character effect of the third embodiment. (A) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the emphasis effect of the third embodiment is performed, and (B) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the over-winning effect of the third embodiment is performed. It is a time chart when a power-off occurs during the execution of the jackpot type display of the third embodiment. It is a time chart when a power-off occurs during the execution of the round display of the third embodiment. It is a control block diagram which shows the control composition of the gaming machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the staging control board of 4th Embodiment. It is a functional block diagram which shows the transition mode control means and the performance information management means at the time of power-on of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the main control board unit of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the performance display monitor of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the basic game specification of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / failing lottery table of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation at the time of power-on of 4th Embodiment, and the transition mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of the setting value in the performance display monitor of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the notification content in the setting change mode of the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the notification content in the setting confirmation mode of the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the storage area of the RAM of the main control board of the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the performance information storage area of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of the base value of each section of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display content displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment of 4th Embodiment for each management section (measurement section). It is a time chart when the first hit occurs in the first section A at the time of power-on of the 4th embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing an initial display period when the gaming state at the time of power off / returning of the fourth embodiment is the special gaming state, and (B) is the gaming state at the time of power off / returning of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the initial display period in the game state. It is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during execution of a jackpot game.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
The front view and the rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. First, with reference to this figure, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined. The pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions equivalent to those of the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and is the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game. It is possible to develop a game (second special symbol game).

<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machines>
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as “gaming machine PM”) is aligned with the front surface of the opening of the outer frame 1 forming the vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer square frame size. The front frame 2 which is configured in the size of a square frame and forms an opening / closing mounting frame is attached to the front right edge so that it can be opened / closed and detached sideways by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 arranged on the front left edge of each other. It is always held in a closed state engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided.

A rectangular glass frame 5 matching the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and the locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state that covers the front surface of the front frame 2. The game board 20 is detachably set and held in the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the double glazing of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker 11 that generates a sound effect according to the development status of the game are provided. Upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 8 and lower ball plate 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and an effect of being pressed by a player in the center of the front of the upper ball plate 8 is produced. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for launching a game ball is provided on the front right side of the lower ball plate 9. In the following, for convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as "effect button 15", but the effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button type switch and an output according to the direction of operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch sensor , Touch panel, etc., used in concepts that include all operation input means.

The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. Further, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 form a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA, and the position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (inner rail 42). A ball return prevention valve 43 is provided at the tip end portion) to prevent the game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various types such as a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, an operating gate 53, a large winning opening 54, and a general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64, etc. In addition to the winning opening, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol hold lamp 73, the second special symbol hold lamp 74, the ordinary symbol display device 75, the normal symbol hold lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21.

The game area PA is a left side area PA1 which is a left side area of the center decoration 21 (a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and a right side area of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to right-handed hitting) with the center decoration 21 in the center as a reference. It is divided into a right side area PA2 which is a board area). A top plate portion 22 facing the outer rail 41 in the substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center decoration 21, and is located between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the guide passage. A connecting passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right side region PA2 is formed. In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can mainly enter any of the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has rolled down without entering each winning opening to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51 is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) that mainly flows down the left side region PA1 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to the right-handed hit, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) which mainly flows down the right side area PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522 generally referred to as an electric chew, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522. The ordinary electric accessory 522 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52 or is difficult to enter. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity described later (an opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). In the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a front-rear slide type movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) in which the second starting port 52 is closed to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and the second starting port 52 is opened to allow the game ball to enter. It is possible to slide in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between the open position (retracted position) and the easy opening position (retracted position). The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to incline downward from the right side to the left side in the front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a taxiway, and the game ball can flow down on the taxiway from right to left. It flows down toward you and falls from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

The actuating gate 53 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the actuating gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 52.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontally rectangular shape that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In this example, the large winning opening 54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in special games (big hit game, small hit game), when launching a game ball, by hitting at the right side area PA2, so-called right-handed hit, it is easy to enter the big winning opening 54. It has become.

The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side region PA1 which is a board surface region corresponding to left-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 include a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like, and the game ball to any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is configured. It is also possible to detect incoming balls.

The general winning opening 64 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 includes a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, but the opportunity to acquire the prize ball like the other winning openings (excluding the operating gate 53). It becomes.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and definite display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and definite display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The first special figure holding lamp 73 and the second special figure holding lamp 74 are composed of, for example, two LED lamps, respectively, and the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is increased by the lighting / blinking display of the lamps. Express (up to 4 each). The number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is the number related to the random number value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. There is, and the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, the number in which the pass / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the pass / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value is shown. Similarly, the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is a random number value acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. This is the number to which the acquired random value is suspended, that is, the number for which the pass / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the pass / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value. There is.

The ordinary symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and definite display of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of hold of normal symbol changes (the number of normal symbol changes that have not yet been executed). A round display 77 is provided on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75 to display the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (number of rounds: number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated). ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes a variable effect of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed / stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and an effect of predicting or notifying the expectation of a big hit. In addition to displaying the image, the hold display corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display area 700 for executing variable display of decorative symbols, a notice effect display, and the like, a first special figure hold lamp 73, and a second special figure hold lamp 74. In synchronization with There is. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 70. The decorative symbol display unit 700 has three rows of display areas (left symbol display area Z1, middle symbol display area Z2, right symbol display area Z3) that are variable display areas of decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) Is provided, the left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the left symbol display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle symbol display area Z2, and the right of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right symbol display area Z3. Each symbol is stopped and displayed. The hold image display unit 710 displays a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of entry) of the activated reserved balls of the special symbol, and the maximum of 4 reserved images of the 1st special symbol and the maximum 4 reserved images of the 2nd special symbol are displayed. It can be displayed. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing variable display is displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that executes an effect operation according to the development status of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. Further, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “directing lamp LP”.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. On the back side of the front frame 2, there are upper and lower back set boards 30 based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape that is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 and has a window that communicates back and forth in the center. It is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so that it can be opened and closed laterally and can be attached and detached. A rectangular box-shaped back set cover 30C with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the staging control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 is connected to a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. A prize for guiding the game ball paid out from the ball supply passage portion 33, the prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out the game ball guided by the ball supply passage portion 33, and the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, a production control board 200 that controls the overall production, image display according to the game development, and sound effect control. An image control board 300, etc. for performing the above are attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, a payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of the game ball, and power is received from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic parts. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) that outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the power supply board 500 and the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30. Arranged. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) to enable the pachinko gaming machine PM to operate.

<Control configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3 additionally, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores control programs, various data, and the like, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and a buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and peripheral boards and each. It is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and the main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform the main control over the progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 has a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and resets the main CPU 101 when it malfunctions or goes out of control. It operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, the CTC circuit that enables the generation of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (built-in random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off, and is used when the power is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored). ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area.

Further, the main control board 100 is electrically formed with a first starting port switch 511, a second starting port switch 521, an operating gate switch 531, a large winning opening switch 541, a left general winning opening switch 611, a right general winning opening switch 641 and the like. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special symbol hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a normal symbol hold lamp. In addition to being electrically connected to the 76, it is electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are transmitted via the I / O port circuit 104. It is transmitted to the display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. The external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 and the staging control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in one direction from the main control board 100 to the staging control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the main control board 100, and data transmission cannot be requested to the main control board 100.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores the effect control program and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, and the like. It is equipped with a production control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute the main control related to the game effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset when the sub-main CPU 201, which is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, malfunctions or goes out of control. WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and for input / output serial data It is equipped with serial communication circuits, etc., which are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing an image and sound to the image control board 300 in an effect control process based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Ramp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The staging control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and an image control command related to image and sound is transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the image control board 300, and as a response thereof, the effect control board 200 is transmitted. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the staging control board 200.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 adopt clock-synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches the switch in the circuit on / off based on the lamp control signal. Therefore, the drive current is supplied or cut off to the effect lamp LP, and the effect lamp LP is controlled to be turned on or off.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching the switch in the circuit on / off based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the staging control board 200. Alternatively, it is shut off to control the operation of each movable accessory 24. A parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image production based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores an image control program, various data, and the like, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. It is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured to include a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. , The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control related to the image effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301, and the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, and reads image data stored in an image ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits the video signal (image data) generated by image processing to the effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from an image ROM is connected to this VDP. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the voice ROM in response to the instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by the synthesis processing to the speaker 11 via the amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be bidirectionally communicable, and controls for driving the prize ball payout unit 34 to pay out the prize balls based on the payout control command from the main control board 100. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the launching handle 12 to control the launching of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 has a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board and a backup power supply based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island. It is configured with a backup power supply circuit for generating power and a power supply cutoff monitoring circuit for monitoring power supply cutoff due to a voltage drop, and is a power supply required for electronic and electrical parts such as each control board and gaming equipment. Supply. A power switch for activating the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board 500, and it is assumed that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, and when the power supply switch is turned on, the power supply board A predetermined power supply is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit of 500. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is cut off, and when the power supply cutoff is detected, the power supply cutoff signal (NMI signal) for notifying that fact is sent to the main control board 100. , Transmission to the staging control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is designed to be charged when power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value is connected to the power supply board 500 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal from the main control board 100. The external information signal output by the external information terminal plate 600 to an external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a jackpot signal, a continuous villa signal, a symbol confirmation signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), and a door. It includes a frame opening signal, a security signal (also referred to as a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal and the like. Further, the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display can be a useful judgment material for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall inside the gaming store, and makes each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without going through a data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko gaming machines>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked, and the pachinko machine PM is used for the game. The game is started by storing the game ball in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8 are sent out to the launching mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feeding mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5. It is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated with less than a predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side region PA2 and flows down the left side region PA1. In this left side region PA1, a left side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the first starting port 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side region PA2 and flows down the right side region PA2. In the right side region PA2, a right side flow path for flowing the game ball toward the operating gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 is formed. The game balls flowing down the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA2 in this way have the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operating gate 53 according to the paths distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , The large winning opening 54 and the general winning opening 61 to 64 can be entered, but if the ball is not entered in any of the winning openings, the ball is flowed down to the out opening 29.

When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first starting port 51, the second starting opening 52, the large winning opening 54, and the general winning opening 61 to 63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning opening is awarded. The ball is paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, as the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters each prize opening (referred to as "unit prize ball number"), the first starting port 51 is "4" and the second. The starting opening 52 is set to "1", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the large winning opening 54 is set to "15". The number of unit prize balls in each winning opening is not limited to the number illustrated in this embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the first starting port 51 may be "1" instead of "4". Further, the second starting port 52 may be "3" instead of "1". Further, the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be "5" instead of "3". Further, the large winning opening may be "10" instead of "15".

When the game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, a lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an operation holding ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined start condition (a change start condition of a special symbol described later) is satisfied, a hit / fail determination, a symbol determination, and a variation pattern determination of the special symbol are performed on the lottery random number value related to the earliest operation holding ball. The special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70 in an manner corresponding to this determination result. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the big winning opening 54 is changed to the open state only once or a plurality of times. When a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the large winning opening 54 reaches the opening time limit, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, an embodiment in which three types of symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the jackpot, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, if a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined final number of times. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (big hit game) will occur relatively early. Become. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the number of fluctuation display times until the next big hit occurs.

Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be activated in association with or independently of the function of changing the probability of the special symbol. When the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lottery per unit time is improved (big hit per unit time). Ease of acquisition can be increased).

Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the electric chew support function (also simply referred to as "electric support") may be activated in association with or independently of the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The electric chew support function enhances the ease of entering the second starting port 52 by operating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522. It is a state (also referred to as "electric support state" or "easy ball entry state"). When the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than that in the normal state. When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a high possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 will also increase. It also increases the possibility that the number of balls entered will increase. Therefore, by activating the electric chew support function, the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 52 increase during that period, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls of the game ball, becomes high. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chew support function is operating is also referred to as a “high base state”, and the state in which the electric chew support function is not operating is also referred to as a “low base state”.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko gaming machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / staging control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 4. Note that FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / staging control board 200).

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, and a normal symbol lottery processing means 145. It includes a special game control means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric accessory control means 160, a game state control means 165, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission / reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means on the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional expression of something.

The ball entry determining means 110 is based on detection signals from the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, and the like, and each winning opening. Judge the entry of the game ball into. When the ball entry determination means 110 detects the entry of a game ball by the first start port switch 511, the ball entry determination means 110 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “first start port winning command”) to that effect, and the first 2 When the entry of the game ball is detected by the start opening switch 521, an effect control command (referred to as “the second start opening winning command”) indicating that effect is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 is used to generate the game ball. When the passage is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operation gate winning command") is generated to indicate that fact, and when the large winning opening switch 541 detects the entry of a game ball, it indicates that fact. When a production control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated and a game ball entry is detected by the left general winning opening switch 611, an effect control command ("left general winning opening" indicating that effect is detected. (Referred to as "winning command") is generated, and when the right general winning opening switch 611 detects the entry of a game ball, an effect control command (referred to as "right general winning opening winning command") is generated to that effect. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The game lottery random number generating means 120 is used for a winning / losing lottery of a special symbol by taking in a built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding a soft random number per special symbol described later to the built-in random number. Generate a random number per special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as a random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the initial value for a new update after one cycle of the special symbol soft random number added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for the hit random number generation and the special symbol soft random number update is completed. Soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining, special symbol stop symbol random number used for determining the hit symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number Special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for new update after one cycle of update is completed, special symbol fluctuation pattern random number for selection of special symbol variation pattern, Random number per normal symbol to be used for winning / failing lottery of normal symbol, initial value random number per normal symbol to determine the initial value for new update after one cycle update of random number per normal symbol is completed, Ordinary symbol variation pattern Random numbers for use in selecting the variation pattern of ordinary symbols are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random number is not executed while the timer interrupt process is not executed (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.). (During loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, which is a random number value per special symbol, per special symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 or the second starting opening 52. The symbol random value and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation pending ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in which the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is combined with the entry order of the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Temporarily stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of 180.

In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area) and the hold 2 storage area (2) are in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52. A hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided. Each hold storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a random number of special symbol variation patterns as a set of operation hold ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage. It is digested in the order of areas (principle of first-in first-out). Further, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage area, respectively. Hold 4 Clears the contents of the storage area to zero.

Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 has a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball count counter. The special symbol hold control means 131 increments the corresponding counter by 1 each time it acquires one special symbol operation hold ball as an update process of the number of operation hold balls of the special symbol, and one operation hold ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

Further, when the special symbol hold control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command including the update information of the hold ball number (“symbol memory”). A number command) is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. As a general rule, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they are entered, but in the present embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation hold ball related to the second special symbol game exists, the operation hold related to the second special symbol game is held regardless of the existence of the operation hold ball related to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere. Under this priority digestion, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is digested. It will be put on hold.

The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, which is a random number value per normal symbol, a symbol random value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operating gate 53. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation holding ball information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 stores the operation hold ball information of the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in the form of being combined with the entry order of the hold balls. Temporarily memorize. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter for each acquisition of one normal symbol hold ball as an update process of the number of hold balls of the normal symbol, and one action hold ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the pre-determination means 135 acquires the operation-holding ball of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 executes a pre-determination for pre-reading notice for the operation-holding ball. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-judgment timing, when (1) waiting for a hit and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and Either when the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is operating, or when the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit. It is time to meet the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-judgment timing is an example, and the pre-judgment timing is changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol having no ordinary electric accessory, and eight pieces are reserved at normal times. For models that can store pachinko machines, the above (1) can be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.), or even if a specification that makes a pre-judgment at any time without setting a pre-judgment timing is adopted. good. Further, in each game state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be the target of the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state, it is preferable that only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation hold ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether or not the result is correct. Pre-judgment (pre-judgment of hit / fail), pre-judgment of symbol (pre-judgment of symbol), and pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern (pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers in each of the pass / fail pre-judgment table, the symbol pre-judgment table, and the variation pattern pre-judgment table is divided into a plurality of areas. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the pre-judgment (also referred to as a "pre-judgment number")) is assigned to each of these areas (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery (result of winning / failing determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination) by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later. It should be noted that the winning / failing pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determining table, and the like may be the same as the winning / failing lottery table, the symbol lottery table, and the like used for the lottery when the fluctuation is actually started. Here, the fluctuation pattern pre-determination table may change the game status at the start of fluctuation (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a time reduction, whether or not it is during a limited frequency period that refers to a special table, the number of reserved balls, etc.). Therefore, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. Further, as a modification, it is configured to predetermine a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area. You may. Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / failing determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143. When the change start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 is stored in the earliest storage area (reserved 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180. The stored special symbol per random value, special symbol per symbol random value, and special symbol variation pattern random value are read out and used as the special symbol hit / miss determination area, special symbol symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern of the main information storage means 180. Store each in the judgment area. Here, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (A3). ) When all the conditions of the existence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol are satisfied. In addition, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (B3). It is when all the conditions that the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists is satisfied. When the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is preferentially processed under the above-mentioned priority digestion. do.

The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol winning / failing determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a winning / failing determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and miss. Decide if you want to. The result of this hit / fail determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H"), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 holds a special symbol winning / failing lottery table referred to at the time of this winning / failing determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table. FIG. 5A is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and FIG. 5B is a gaming state (high probability) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. State). In the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated in the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, the random number value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 204". In the gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, a big hit is obtained when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 1506". That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1 / 319.69" to the high probability "1 / 43.49". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is set equally between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the hit / miss determination of the special symbol. The winning probability of a small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 has a first special symbol jackpot symbol table and a second special symbol that are referred to when determining a jackpot symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means the special symbol after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of.

In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probabilistic game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", and ( 2) The gaming state in which the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability fluctuation function operating is called the "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (3) all The state in which the function is not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state" and the "time saving game state" are more advantageous game states for the player than the "normal game state". Therefore, in the following, as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are also referred to as "advantageous gaming state".

In addition, each gaming state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variable gaming state can be expressed as "high probability high base state", (2) time-saving gaming state can be expressed as "low probability high base state", and (3) normal gaming state can be expressed as "low probability low base state". In addition, the operating state of the probability fluctuation function is a high probability state, while the operating state of the electric chew support function is a low base state (a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the "normal gaming state"). One) may be provided, such a gaming state may be referred to as a latent gaming state, and this latent gaming state may be referred to as a “high probability low base state”. This latent game state (“high probability low base state”) is a game state suitable for playing a game mainly with a small hit, and the details will be described later. Regarding these states (combination state of low probability / high probability and low base / high base), unless otherwise specified, the game state (hit / fail judgment and variation display are possible in a state other than during a big hit or a small hit). Although it refers to a state), it is a low-probability low-base state during a big hit, and is the same game state as the game state at the time of winning a small hit during a small hit. At this time, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol is activated, at least the variation time of the first special symbol (normal game state) in the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game. In the game state (probability variation game state, latent probability game state, time-saving game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game, the variation time of at least the second special symbol (average variation time) is shortened. Time) is shortened.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (1) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (2) game at the time of big hit winning. Determined according to the condition. The number of times each game state is continued (the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed) is the number of times that the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (referred to as "the number of probability fluctuations") and the function of shortening the variation time of the special symbol is activated. It is set according to the number of times (referred to as "the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time") and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated (referred to as "the number of times of electric support"). In the present embodiment, the variable time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol start the operation at the same time and end the operation at the same time. (Therefore, in FIG. 6, the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time" and the "number of times of electric support operation" are described in the same column).

FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, each round. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the two types of jackpots (symbol group) are divided into 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group A)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000", and the number of electric support is "10000". The probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. In this probabilistic game state, a huge number of times of continuation (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number, electric support number) is set as "10000 times", and the jackpot must not be won until the continuation number is reached. Is not probabilistic (winning at about 1/44), so it will continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group B)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of electric support is "100". The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times), the specified number of jackpot games, and each round. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three types of jackpots (symbol group) are divided into 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: symbol group C)
When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000", and the number of electric support is "10000". The probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is set to a huge number of times of "10000 times" as the number of times of continuation, and continues until the next big hit occurs substantially. In addition, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds". Further, this 16R specific jackpot may be a specification that wins even the first special symbol, and in that case, it is harder to win than the second special symbol (for example, 5% of all jackpot symbols is set as the first. In 1 special symbol, it is preferable that the 16R specific jackpot is 5%, the 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and the 4R normal jackpot is 35%).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group D)
When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000", and the number of electric support is "10000". The probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is set to a huge number of times of "10000 times", and continues until the next big hit occurs substantially. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group E)
When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of electric support is "100". The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot types are 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 4R.
Three types are provided: a specific jackpot (symbol groups A and D) and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol groups B and E). The expected value of winning a prize ball in a special game (referred to as "expected value of winning a prize ball") is 16R specific jackpot> 4R specific jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds of the special game when the big hit is won in the first special symbol is "4 rounds", while the actual number of rounds of the special game when the big hit is won in the second special symbol is "4 rounds". Since it is "16 rounds", there is a higher possibility of shifting to a special game with a large number of rounds when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol than in the case where a big hit occurs in the first special symbol. It is advantageous for the player in that he / she can get a ball. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of executions of the "long open round game" set for the special game. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is a fixed time of 29 seconds (although all rounds are referred to as "long opening round games"), but a predetermined round during the same jackpot game. Or, in all rounds, a "short open round game" that shortens the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 to 2 seconds is provided so that even if the number of rounds of the big hit game is the same, the balls are substantially released. A configuration having a jackpot with a different number of rounds that can be obtained (a jackpot with a different number of actual rounds) may be adopted. In the long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 54 or can be easily entered. It is a round game. In the short open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or is difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54. It is a game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of variation patterns. In each figure, "selection rate" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random value) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. It is premised that the various fluctuation patterns are associated with the fluctuation time for each fluctuation pattern as the end condition of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is also executed at the fluctuation time.

Here, the fluctuation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, a "normal selection state", a "time saving selection state", and a "probability variation selection state" are set as a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a fluctuation pattern selection state set in response to a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which none of the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function is activated. In the time saving selection state, the fluctuation time setting corresponding to the gaming state (time saving gaming state) in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated but the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated. The pattern is selected. The probabilistic selection state is a variable pattern selection state that is set corresponding to a gaming state (probability variable gaming state) in which all of the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are operating.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even so, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation hold balls shown in each figure (“hold 0”, “hold 1-2”, “hold 3”).
Means the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-reserved balls after hold digestion) in the case of a variable pattern lottery of the first special symbol, and in the case of a variable pattern lottery of the second special symbol. It means the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of operation-reserved balls after holding digestion). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the variation display / after the hold digestion) (excluding the operation-holding balls digested by the variation display). .. As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a reference, FIGS. 7 to 9 also describe the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are effects in which the three rows of decorative symbols fluctuate and become "off" in so-called disjointed eyes without going through the reach state even once. Is. In the following, ultra-shortening fluctuations, shortening fluctuations, and normal fluctuations are collectively referred to as "non-reach loss". This non-reach out-of-reach type differs from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time in the shortened variation than in the normal variation and in the ultra-shortened variation than in the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative symbol is stopped in two rows (generally the left column and the right column) of the three rows of decorative symbols (reach state), and the remaining one row (general). If a different decorative symbol stops in the middle row), it will be "missing", and if the same decorative symbol stops in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row), it will be a "big hit".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach production with a relatively higher expectation of a big hit than the above N reach, and after the reach is established, it develops from the N reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action. Etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as the types of SP reach. The SP reach A is a reach effect executed when the currently being executed gaming state is the normal state. The SP reach B is a reach effect executed when the currently being executed gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. The SP reach C is a reach effect executed when the currently being executed gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state. In the variation pattern type of this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher in the order of "non-reach" <"N reach" <"SP reach". As a modification, the effect content of the SP reach may be the same (SP reach A) in the normal state and the time-saving gaming state, and a different SP reach (SP reach C) may be used in the probabilistic gaming state. Further, as another modification, a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream may be prepared. Pseudo-ream means that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variablely displayed during one variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable display is performed multiple times in a pseudo manner. (Pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-variation effect, pseudo-continuous variation effect, re-variation effect). That is, the pseudo-ream is an effect of executing the pseudo-variation in which the temporary stop or the fixed stop is executed a plurality of times after all the decorative symbols in the three rows start to change or re-change. It is shown that the larger the number of pseudo-reams (the number of pseudo-variations), the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with high expectation of big hits.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the normal selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 One of (SP reach A) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is increased. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation time is relative without depending on the number of pending balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the second special symbol. A short variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation) or PH1-2 (normal variation) is selected. As a modification, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", only the main variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation is selected regardless of the number of pending operations of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation may be configured so as to be the easiest to select (preferably, the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of pending balls of the second special symbol).

Fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time saving selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for loss. .. Here, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation pattern PH2- 2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach A) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is selected regardless of the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol. There is no such thing. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 One of (SP reach B) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. If this is the case, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the easier it is for the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation) to be selected.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) does not depend on the big hit type.
Alternatively, PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the probability variation selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set in the variation pattern table 3 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation pattern PH3- does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). 2 (normal variation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is wrong, the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is selected regardless of the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol. There is no such thing. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is wrong, one of the fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH3-2 (normal fluctuation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. Will be done. At this time, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, the reference destination is according to the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol (for details, depending on the presence or absence of the operation-reserved ball of the second special symbol). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. Since the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) can be selected only when the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present rather than the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is not present. This tends to make it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time.

The variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big hit type (4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) does not depend on the big hit type (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Be selected.

As described above, the variation pattern tables 1 to 3 specify the variation time of the special symbol for each variation pattern, but regardless of which variation pattern is selected, the determination stop time (determination) of the special symbol is specified. The display time) is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the special symbol. Further, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 3, the same effect content and fluctuation time may be obtained at the time of the big hit and at the time of the miss, but it is preferable that the final effect content is different between the time of the big hit and the time of the miss. In other words, even if the N reach is the same, the decorative pattern will be doublet (example: "7, 7, 7") at the time of big hit, while the decorative pattern will be out of reach (example: "7, 8") at the time of miss.・ 7 ”), or even if the SP reach A to C are the same, at the time of a big hit, the final production content will be the production content indicating success, and the decorative pattern will be doublet (example: ally character wins over the enemy character). , After that, "7, 7, 7" is displayed), but when it is out of the way, the final production content becomes the production content indicating failure, and the decorative pattern is out of reach (example: ally character is an enemy character). It is preferable that the player is defeated and then "7, 8, 7" is displayed). Further, it is preferable that the fluctuation time (production time) is longer than that at the time of big hit, even if the production content is the same (when the same SP reach is developed), as an example. It is preferable that the SP reach A to C at the time of a big hit has a fluctuation time (effect time) that is 10 seconds longer than the SP reach A to C at the time of a miss.

After selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, so that the communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. An effect control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not it is present, an effect control command (variation addition information specification command) including a variation addition pattern of a special symbol (information for adding or subtracting a variation time), and a variation pattern of a special symbol. Generate production control commands (variable pattern specification commands) that include information, effect control commands (symbol specification commands) that include information on character production numbers (symbols and game states), etc. (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as ". (Referred to as "variation start command"), which is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol hit / miss determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. When the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol per normal symbol value and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the normal symbol hit / miss determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "conditions for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol" are (1) waiting for the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and (2) the existence of the operation holding ball of the normal symbol. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which fluctuation start is possible (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146 reads a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol, and the determination result is either "hit" or "missing". Determine if it applies to. The result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The ordinary symbol winning / failing determination means 146 holds a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table (not shown) that is referred to when determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is activated. If so, it is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and if the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is a hit, the predetermined hit symbol (an opportunity for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate). On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is out of order, a predetermined out-of-order symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, the symbol A and the symbol B are assigned as the winning symbols of the ordinary symbol, while the symbol C is assigned as the outlier symbol of the ordinary symbol.

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determining means 148 reads the ordinary symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and also refers to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to refer to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table. Determine (variation time). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). Is set to "0.2 seconds" when is operating. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is "0.1 seconds".
Is set. The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In the control of the normal symbol, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, when the electric chew support function is not operating, the hit probability of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to "0", and the normal symbol is controlled. It is also conceivable to adopt a specification in which the fluctuation time is single.

Further, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 holds an ordinary electric accessory opening pattern table that is referred to when determining an opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is set. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 may be different depending on the type of the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol. For example, when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, if the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol is symbol A, "3 seconds opening x 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds) ", and if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is symbol B," 2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5) .8 seconds) ".

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo according to the determined big hit type (symbol group). Determine the execution time (round time) of the round game. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute an effect control command (referred to as a “big hit start demo command”) for instructing the execution of the jackpot start demo effect and execution of the jackpot end demo effect. An effect control command (referred to as a "big hit end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command is also an opportunity for the effect control board 200 to determine the content of a series of jackpot medium effects (big hit start demo effect, round effect, big hit end demo effect) developed during the big hit game. Become. Further, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. , This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds and information on opening and closing of the grand prize opening 54. As will be described later in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is uniformly set to 5 seconds, and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is uniformly set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time (demo time) of the end demo, not only the jackpot type (symbol group) but also the jackpot start demo and jackpot even if the same jackpot type (symbol group) is used depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The execution time (demo time) of the end demo may be different. For example, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, for the 4R normal jackpot, if the jackpot is hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (as a jackpot start demo production). , The execution time of the big hit end demo is 15 seconds (as the big hit end demo effect, the effect B-1 and the prepaid that are displayed as "time saving mode rush" are executed). While it is a card (* a storage medium that stores information about the amount of money required to borrow a game ball), it is used as an effect C to call attention to forgetting to take it), while it is in a high probability high base state or low probability. When a big hit is made in a high base state, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (the production A-1 is executed as the big hit start demo production), and the execution time of the big hit end demo is 10 seconds (as the big hit end demo production). Production B-1 is executed, and production C is not executed). For 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, if a jackpot is hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (big hit start demo). As a production, the production A-2 that is displayed as "Probability change jackpot start" is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20.
Seconds (execution of effects B-2 and C, which are displayed as "probability change mode entry" as a demonstration effect of ending the jackpot), while a jackpot starts when a jackpot is hit in a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state. The execution time of the demo is 5 seconds (execution A-2 is executed as the big hit start demo effect), and the execution time of the big hit end demo is 10 seconds (as the big hit end demo effect, "probability change mode continuation" is displayed. -3 is executed, and the effect C is not executed). In addition, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, if it is a jackpot in the first special symbol, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (16R specific jackpot) regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot. 4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot is 5 seconds, and as a jackpot start demo effect, production A-1 or production A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 30 seconds (16R specific jackpot and 16R specific jackpot and For the 4R specific jackpot, it takes 30 seconds to execute production B-2 and production C as the jackpot end demo production. However, for the 4R normal jackpot, it takes 15 seconds, and as the jackpot end demo production, production B-1 and production C are performed. On the other hand, if it is a big hit with the second special symbol, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit. It is set to 5 seconds, and the execution time of the big hit end demo is 20 seconds (20 seconds for the 16R specific big hit and the 4R specific big hit, and the big hit end demo). As an effect, the effect B-3 is executed and the effect C is not executed. However, the 4R normal jackpot is set to 10 seconds, and the effect B-1 is executed and the effect C is not executed as the big hit end demo effect). .. The relationship between the time values is an example, and if the magnitude relationship of each demo time in each situation is the same as above, the relationship is not limited to this time value. Further, in any of the above specifications, the effect C does not occur when the jackpot is hit in the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state, but the fluctuation related to the jackpot or during the jackpot game (during the special game) When the power is cut off and the power is cut off during the fluctuation or the big hit game, the effect C may be generated exceptionally.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the fluctuation display. Let me. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 72 to variably display the second special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). Generates an effect control command (referred to as a "fluctuation stop command"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 75 to variably display the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and confirms and displays the normal symbol after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

Further, the special symbol display control means 156 issues an effect control command (referred to as "standby demo command") that triggers the execution of the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that the period in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist and the change display of the special symbol is not performed continues for a predetermined time or longer. If the period in which the game ball is not fired continues for a predetermined time or longer, or if the period in which the game ball has not entered all the winning openings continues for a predetermined time or longer, the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It may be a continuous specification.

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after confirming the special symbol, and outputs the control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543. The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a large winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, the operation end condition (end condition of the unit game) of the special electric accessory 542 in the big hit game is that a game ball having a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) enters the big winning opening 54. That is, or the opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time (“29 seconds” in this embodiment).

Further, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 when the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, and the ordinary electric accessory 522 (the first) for a predetermined opening time. 2 The opening / closing control of the starting port 52) is performed. Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 0.2 seconds in a low base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. Then, in the high base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number of game balls (“10” in this embodiment) have entered the second starting port 52, or that the second starting port 52 has a predetermined number of game balls. The opening time has reached the maximum opening time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the game state control means 165 is based on the big hit type (type of symbol group) and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the game state after the end of the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of gaming states, a normal gaming state (low probability low base state), a time-saving gaming state (low probability low base state), and a probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state) are used. It is set, and one of a plurality of types of gaming states is selectively set. Since each gaming state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

Further, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (type of symbol group) when the jackpot game is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game. The fluctuation pattern selection state of is switched. In the present embodiment, a normal selection state, a time saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, depending on the determined game state, jackpot type, number of variation display times of special symbols, and the like. Therefore, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is selectively set. Since each fluctuation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

Further, the game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores the command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, and the like. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to indicate the effect state effect to the effect control board 200. Although the description is omitted in FIGS. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming behavior.

The main information storage means 180 has random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and a game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game. Information on shortening function, electric chew support function), information on variable pattern selection status, result information of hit / fail judgment of special symbols and ordinary symbols (big hit, miss), stop symbols related to special symbols and ordinary symbols (including symbol group) Information, information on variation patterns (including variation addition patterns) of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on jackpot games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of openings per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, It is configured to temporarily store status information indicating the operating state of 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, information of effect control command data, and the like, and a predetermined storage for storing each information. It has an area.

The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE data is "1". Bit7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When transmitting such information as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the staging control board 200 includes a staging lottery random number generation means 210, a staging control means 220, a lamp control means 230, a character control means 240, an error staging control means 250, a sub-main information storage means 260, and a command. Includes transmission / reception means 270. Each of the above-mentioned means in the staging control board 200 is composed of hardware such as a sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, and an electronic circuit arranged on the staging control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional expression of something.

The effect lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as a random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include a look-ahead lottery random number used for the lottery of the look-ahead effect, a decorative symbol random number used for the lottery of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a variable effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect. It includes a notice lottery random number used for the lottery, a big hit effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the big hit effect pattern, a stage lottery random number used for the transition lottery of the effect stage, and the like. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the main process on the effect control side (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100), which will be described later. do.

The staging control means 220 includes a staging mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a look-ahead notice control means 223, a variable staging control means 224, a decorative symbol control means 225, a notice staging control means 226, and a special game staging control means 227. include.

The effect mode control means 221 is based on a game state designation command from the main control board 100, and is consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Also called "game effect mode"). In the present embodiment, "normal effect mode", "time saving effect mode", and "probability variation effect mode" are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and the gaming state (or variation pattern) managed on the main control board 100 side is set. One of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to the selected state), the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, and the like, and the variation effect according to the set effect mode is executed. In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal effect mode" is set, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving effect mode" is set, and the game state is the probabilistic game state. At some point, the "probability change effect mode" is set. When any of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the person is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) Is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

The hold information display control means 222 has a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation hold balls included in this command. On the other hand, the hold information display control means 222 updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter when the change start command from the main control board 100 is received, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested. Further, the hold information display control means 222 displays the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol on the hold image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol. Further, the hold information display control means 222 digests the operation hold ball (the earliest operation hold ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the changing image display area 720 of the effect display device 70. , Controls to display the changing image displayed by switching to the holding image corresponding to this operation holding ball. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are not distinguished and are simply referred to as a "pending image", and are referred to as a changing image of the first special symbol. It may be simply referred to as a "changing image" without distinguishing it from the changing image of the second special symbol.

The look-ahead notice control means 223 executes a look-ahead determination (referred to as “look-ahead lottery”) for the operation holding ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous advance notice effect that announces the possibility of a big hit winning or a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect) over one or more variable displays before the operation hold ball to be read ahead is digested. It occurs as one aspect. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the pre-reading advance notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, respectively. Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the entry order of the operation holding balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100, and holds 1 storage area (first hold storage area) in the order of entry into the start ports 51 and 52. A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided, respectively. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of pre-determination of hit / fail, information on the result of pre-determination of symbols, and information on the result of pre-determination of fluctuation pattern as a set. The information of the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 It is digested in the order of storage area (principle of first-in first-out). Further, when the information of the preliminary determination result of the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary determination result stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is stored in the storage area of the lower number, respectively. At the same time as shifting, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

The variation effect control means 224 is based on the information (variation pattern information, variation addition information, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, and the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. ) Is determined by lottery. The variation effect control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern of a decorative symbol, and a variation pattern of a special symbol from these plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. A variable staging pattern table corresponding to (variable time) is selected. Here, while the main fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B") is determined on the main control board 100 side, the effect control board 200 side is based on the main fluctuation pattern. Sub-variable patterns of decorative patterns (for example, "SP reach A1, A2 ...", "SP reach A2, A3 ...", etc.) that specify the scenario of the effect display process in detail are determined. The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines a variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation, and a notice is given at each stage of the display process. The timing for generating the effect is also defined as the time schedule. In addition, regarding the variation effect pattern of this decorative symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even if the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect modes during the stay are different, they are produced mutually. Variable staging patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, the variable effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during the stay.

Further, the variation effect control means 224 receives the standby demo command from the main control board 100, and receives the standby demo command until the variation display of the special symbol is started (the next variation start). During the customer waiting period (until the command is received), for example, a standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) for playing a moving image for demonstration is executed.

The decorative symbol control means 225 is decorated based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the above variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of stopped symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by, for example, identification elements consisting of numbers and the like. Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for loss of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a missed symbol (missing symbol)". The jackpot symbol indicating the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered symbols are aligned. The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2.2.2") in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned. The out-of-order symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "1 ・ 3 ・ 8") in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol with a number different from the other numbers. Here, among the out-of-reach symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "3, 1, 3") in which only the middle symbol is displaced back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, it may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7". If the lottery result is out of reach,
Specific rolls called "chance eyes" (for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" and "5, 6 and 7" as the order, and "2, 2 and 3" and "5." 5.6 ”etc.) may be selected. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, when a temporary stop display and a re-variable display are performed before the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, a special symbol (a special stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) is used. Pseudo-ream pattern) is selected. When displaying a temporary stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-ream, display a character such as "NEXT" for at least one stop symbol (typically a middle symbol) among the stop symbols of the three rows of decorative symbols. There are cases where the characters are replaced with special symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols) and displayed (for example, "2, NEXT, 3", etc.). The stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the following variable staging patterns, and in principle, the left symbol → the right symbol → the middle symbol are stopped in this embodiment. However, if the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and if it is a special variation effect pattern, the right symbol → It is also possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, and in this case, the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, regardless of the stop order, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol start the fluctuation at the same time when the fluctuation starts. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol attributes of the decorative symbol in the present embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element composed of numbers and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In the present embodiment, all nine types of numbers "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (that is, there are all nine types of decorative symbols). Each decorative symbol is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the symbol row, and is in the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1") on the effect display device 70. In each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, it is cyclically displayed or scrolled, and after "9", it returns to "1" again (or after "1", it returns to "9" again). .. This specification is the same in other embodiments. The symbol attribute of each decorative symbol is determined by the type of color attached to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative symbols are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same symbol attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of colors, "blue", "red", and "gold", are set as the colors of the decorative pattern. In addition, on the drawing, the display mode of three kinds of decorative symbols of "blue", "red", and "gold" is expressed by "white", "diagonal line", and "filled". Specifically, the decorative symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified into blue symbol attributes (blue attributes), and the decorative symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9" are classified. Is classified into a red symbol attribute (red attribute), and the decorative symbol "7" is classified into a golden symbol attribute (gold attribute). In the present embodiment, as the symbol attribute of the decorative symbol, the expectation of winning the ball and the expectation of the probability change transition are increased by one step in the order of "blue" <"red" <"gold". In the following, for convenience, the blue attribute decorative symbol is also referred to as a “blue symbol”, the red attribute decorative symbol is also referred to as a “red symbol”, and the golden attribute decorative symbol is also referred to as a “gold symbol”.

The advance notice effect control means 226 draws a lottery for the advance notice effect pattern that defines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by. The notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, or the like temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol, and suggests that the symbol variation is stopped in the jackpot mode and the jackpot reliability is high. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including the time when the reach occurs) in the process of displaying the variation of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each notice effect has a different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher expectation of the jackpot than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The advance notice effect control means 226 holds the advance notice lottery table referred to when selecting the advance notice effect pattern for each type of advance notice effect, and the advance notice according to the type of the advance notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. The lottery table is selected. As specific types of notice production, for example, comment notice production, background notice production, SU (step-up) notice production, logo notice production, mini character notice production, group notice production, character notice production, etc. are prepared. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing the display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is varied and displayed by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the content (big hit effect pattern) of the big hit medium effect that notifies that the big hit game is in progress. The jackpot middle production includes a jackpot start demo production that notifies the start of the jackpot game, a round production that notifies that the round game is in progress, and a jackpot end demo production that notifies the end of the jackpot game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the big hit start demo command from the main control board 100, the big hit medium effect pattern (big hit start demo effect pattern) is based on the information of the big hit type stored in the sub-main information storage means 260. , Round production pattern, jackpot end demo production pattern) is decided. In this jackpot production pattern, the jackpot start demo production time, the round production time (the production time according to the opening pattern of the jackpot 54), and the jackpot end demo production time are set, and along the time axis. A series of production contents are set. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the jackpot start demo effect when the jackpot start demo command is received from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and receives the round effect designation command as a trigger. Each round effect is executed, and the big hit end demo effect is executed when the big hit end demo command is received. In the jackpot start demo production, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the big hit game are displayed. Then, in the jackpot end demo effect, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen to notify the end of the jackpot game, and an effect indicating the game state (mode) to be shifted thereafter is displayed.

As described above, the staging control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined staging contents (look-ahead staging pattern, variable staging pattern, notice staging pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot staging pattern, etc.). This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. Is read out, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

The accessory control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. ..

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative symbol information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and is predetermined for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. Contains an ACK command buffer to store ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100, executes reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the effect control command, and executes various effect control commands in this interrupt process. It is supposed to get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command with priority over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing of priority level 7 or less described later). ing.

Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to indicate the execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variablely display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. , The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260.

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PA having such a configuration is configured so that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game and the like. In the following, among various game effects, the contents of the big hit medium effect will be described. In the following, "restricting execution" or "regulating execution" means, for example, not executing all, not executing a part, lowering the priority of display or output, etc. It is used as a concept including. Further, in the following, "duplicate execution (duplicate execution)" means that one execution period (or execution timing) and the other execution period (or execution timing) overlap, and both executions are executed. It is used in the concept including the case where all the periods (or execution timings) overlap and the case where both execution periods (or execution timings) partially overlap.

[Direction during big hit]
As described above, the jackpot middle production includes a jackpot start demo production, a round production, and a jackpot end demo production. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a jackpot type (type of symbol group), a jackpot symbol combination (combination of decorative symbols when a jackpot occurs), and a jackpot medium effect pattern. (A) in the figure is referred to when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, and (B) in the figure is referred to when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state. .. As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the jackpot symbol combination and the type of the jackpot medium effect pattern are determined according to the jackpot type (symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process. In the present embodiment, even if the big hit types are the same, the type of the big hit symbol combination and the type of the big hit medium effect pattern can be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit.

The jackpot symbol combination is composed of a combination "* ・ * ・ *" of a stop mode in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are aligned (*: decorative symbol of an arbitrary number). As for the jackpot symbol combination, "specific jackpot" such as "1.1.1", "3.3.3", "5.5.5", "7/7/7", "9/9/9" The odd-numbered symbol combinations (red symbol combinations, gold symbol combinations) and "specific hits" such as "2.2.2", "4.4.4", "6/6/6", and "8/8/8" It is distinguished from the even-numbered symbol combination (blue symbol combination) indicating "normal jackpot". That is, the odd-numbered symbol combination (gold symbol combination, red symbol combination) is a jackpot symbol combination that is confirmed to have won the "specific jackpot", while the even-numbered symbol combination (blue symbol combination) is the "specific jackpot" and "specific jackpot". It is a jackpot symbol combination in which it is uncertain which jackpot type of "normal jackpot" is won.

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" and that the player has won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. That is, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that deterministically notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot), which has the highest degree of advantage among the plurality of jackpot types. For the red symbol combination, it is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", but the player must have won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. It is a jackpot symbol combination that informs. It has been confirmed that the actual number of rounds of the blue symbol combination is "4 rounds", but whether it has won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state, or the "short-time game state" It is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that it is uncertain whether or not the "normal jackpot" that triggers the transition has been won. Here, even if it is a combination of blue symbols, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (that is, even if the actual number of rounds is a probabilistic jackpot of "16 rounds", the blue symbols may be used. It may be configured so that the combination can be selected), but it is preferable that the red symbol combination has a higher possibility that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "ki jackpot productions" described later, a "ki jackpot C production" that is probable change promotion and round promotion may be provided.

In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of big hit medium production patterns, "super long hit big hit production", "long life big hit A production", "long life big hit B production", "ki big hit A production", and "ki big hit B production" are set. Has been done. The super longevity big hit effect is a big hit medium effect pattern type set in correspondence with the big hit symbol combination being a "gold symbol combination". The Kotobuki jackpot A effect and the Kotobuki jackpot B effect are big hit medium effect pattern types set in response to the fact that the jackpot symbol combination is a "red symbol combination". The big hit effect A and the big hit B effect are big hit medium effect pattern types set corresponding to the case where the big hit symbol combination is a “blue symbol combination”. That is, the jackpot medium effect pattern type is set according to the symbol attributes (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the jackpot symbol combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11A, a jackpot symbol combination and a jackpot middle effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state will be described. First, when the "4R specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "super longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11B, the jackpot symbol combination and the jackpot middle effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state will be described. When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the gold symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the red symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "super longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Shou Big Hit B Production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium production pattern. When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

The super longevity jackpot effect is a jackpot effect pattern that deterministically notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot), which has the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of jackpots.

It has been confirmed that the Kotobuki jackpot A production and the Kotobuki jackpot B production have won the "specific jackpot" type, which triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (4 rounds) is reached. Is a big hit medium production pattern in which the production progresses while it is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds". Here, even if the Kotobuki jackpot A production reaches the predetermined number of rounds (4th round), the promotion production (round promotion production) is not performed, and the specified number of rounds of this jackpot game is "4 rounds". It is confirmed that there is. On the other hand, in the Kotobuki jackpot B production, when the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached, a promotion production (round promotion production) occurs, and the specified number of rounds of this jackpot game is "16 rounds". (The specified number of rounds has been promoted to "16 rounds") is confirmed.

It has been confirmed that the actual number of rounds for the Ki jackpot A production and the Ki jackpot B production is "4 rounds", but until the demo of the end of the jackpot is reached, the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. It is a big hit medium production pattern in which the production progresses while it is uncertain whether the winner is the "normal big hit" that triggers the transition to the time-saving game state. Here, in the Ki jackpot A production, even if the jackpot end demo is reached, the promotion production (probability variation promotion production) is not performed, and the jackpot type this time is "normal jackpot" (time reduction after the end of this jackpot game). (Transitioning to the game state) is confirmed. On the other hand, in the Ki jackpot B production, when the jackpot end demo is reached, a promotion production (probability change promotion production) occurs, and the jackpot type this time is "specific jackpot" (probability change game state after the end of this jackpot game). To move to) is confirmed. Further, in FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot medium-sized production pattern is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, but as shown in FIG. 11B, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. It may be a correspondence relationship. Further, the 16R specific jackpot may be provided on the first special symbol, and in that case, the super longevity jackpot effect or the longevity jackpot B effect may be executed even at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol. The details of the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probable change promotion effect) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each big hit medium effect pattern will be described. 12 to 16 are schematic views showing the contents of the big hit medium effect pattern. In the figure, the correspondence between the types of individual effects generated during the big hit game and the timing of occurrence is defined for each big hit medium effect pattern. In addition, in the figure, in order to facilitate understanding of the explanation, an opening mode of the large winning opening 54 is added. However, in the present embodiment, as an opening mode of the large winning opening 54, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is such that a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or the opening time is easy to enter. Only the set "long opening" is prepared, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is the specified count number (full count) of the game ball. A "short opening" set to an opening time that is impossible or difficult to enter may be prepared.

First, during the execution of the big hit start demo, a screen suggesting the type of the big hit middle effect (super long hit big hit effect, longevity big hit effect, ki big hit effect) is displayed, and any big hit medium effect is started for the player. It is suggested that this is the case. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to "5 seconds" for all jackpots.

During the execution of each round game, a round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the big hit medium effect (super longevity big hit effect, longevity big hit effect, ki big hit effect). That is, if the big hit medium effect pattern is a super long hit big hit effect, the super long hit round screen, if the big hit A effect A or the long big hit B effect, the long life big hit round screen, the happy big hit A effect or the happy big hit B In the case of directing, the Ki jackpot round screen is displayed. However, if the round promotion effect described later occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of this big hit medium effect will be promoted, and the round effect screen of the lower rank type will be switched to the round effect screen of the higher rank type. It has become.

After the end of each round game, the interval is the pause time (the closing time of the big winning opening 54) from the end of each round game to the start of the setting of the next round game or the jackpot end demo. A period has been set. Therefore, the special game is "Big hit start demo"-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> ...-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> "Big hit end demo" It is developed in the flow such as. In the present embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" in common for all jackpots. The details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the jackpot end demo, the content of the effect mode (game state) to be shifted after the end of the currently executed jackpot game is suggested, and it is suggested to the player which effect mode to enter or continue. Will be done. In addition, during this jackpot end demo period, a probabilistic promotion effect or a hold consecutive suggestion effect, which will be described later, may be performed. It should be noted that the hold-ream suggestion effect performed during this jackpot end demo period includes the hold-ream suggestion effect (over-winning effect or bonus-winning effect) that is performed when an over-winning or bonus winning occurs in the modified example described later. Combined production) is not included. That is, the hold-ream suggestion effect according to the modification described later is not an effect performed during the jackpot end demo period, but an effect performed during the interval period. The details of the probabilistic promotion effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect of this embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpots. As for the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, as mentioned above, it is either the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state) or the big hit game in the consecutive villas (that is, the high probability). Each demo time may be configured differently depending on whether it is a high base state or a big hit from a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of the jackpot game during the consecutive villas, the processing of the game before and after the jackpot proceeds more quickly than in the case of the jackpot game at the time of the first hit (the game in the consecutive villas is performed more quickly). (To proceed), each demo time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as mentioned above, when performing a production to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card in the jackpot game at the time of the first hit, it is preferable to perform it within the jackpot end demo period set for a relatively long time. Yes, when performing a production to call attention to forgetting to take the prepaid card in the jackpot game during the consecutive villas, it is possible to perform it during the round game execution period instead of the jackpot end demo period set in a relatively short time. Suitable. In addition, regarding the hold consecutive suggestion effect, in the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute even if there is a big hit hold in the hold or to lower the execution probability. Yes, in a jackpot game during a consecutive villa (that is, a jackpot from a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state), it is preferable not to execute or increase the execution probability even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold. .. Further, the hold continuous suggestion effect is preferably performed during the execution of the special game corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot, and is executed when the jackpot hold in the hold is the jackpot hold corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot. (That is, the jackpot where the hold-ream suggestion effect is displayed and the jackpot hold in the hold that triggers the execution of the hold-ream suggestion effect are targeted only for the 16R specific jackpot, and the 4R specific / normal jackpot is targeted. It is preferable not to become).

Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen (round effect screen) during a round game. Although not shown, various images (animation images, etc.) according to the type of the big hit medium effect pattern are displayed in the central area of the screen in order to excite the big hit game.

In the round display area 730 of the screen, the number of rounds (third round in the illustrated example) indicating the number of round games currently being executed is displayed. For example, if the currently executing round game is the first round game (first round), "ROUND1" is displayed in the round display area, and the currently executing round game is the second round game (second round). In the case of (round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and even after that, "ROUND3", "ROUND4", and so on are displayed in the round display area every time a round game is played.

In the right-handed display area 731 of the screen, a right-handed image (also referred to as a firing instruction effect) prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-handed area PA2 (right-handed) is displayed. In addition, even though the situation should be right-handed (during a big hit), on the contrary, when the game ball flows down the left side area PA1 and enters the general winning openings 61 to 63, or the first start. When the ball enters the mouth 51, that is, when the game ball is fired toward the left side region PA1, an effect (attention notification effect) that calls attention to the player so as not to hit the left side is executed. You may do it. In the attention notification effect, a message instructing right-handedness is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP is lit in a special light emitting mode (for example, high-brightness, high-speed or instantaneous blinking) to make the game ball. The player is notified that the ball should be fired toward the right area PA2 (right-handed). As a caution notification effect, for example, a voice "Please hit right" (right-handed instruction voice) may be output from the speaker 11. It is desirable that the attention notification effect is in a conspicuous position (for example, a central display area) and a size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that the player can clearly see it. , Even in a situation where the right-handed image, the display content in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display content in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the highlighting effect, and the display content of the round display area 730 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be displayed. However, since the right-handed image is also information that should be clearly communicated to the player (information on the appropriate launch position), the right-handed image and the attention notification effect may be displayed in different display areas so as not to be superimposed. Appropriate. On the other hand, from the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display contents in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents of the round display area 730 so as not to impair the visibility of the attention notification effect. However, it is desirable to configure it so that the display priority is high (that is, it can be superimposed and displayed, but in that case, the caution notification effect is displayed in the foreground). This launch instruction effect is displayed as a display condition when the ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 during the big hit, or when the ball enters the first starting opening 51, but the display time is set to 10 seconds. Has been done. However, if the display condition is satisfied again before the display time of 10 seconds elapses, 10 seconds is set as the display time again (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-handed image and the attention notification effect not only in the big hit but also in the high-base state such as the high-probability high-base state and the low-probability high-base state, and the right-handed image is displayed from the big hit. If it is continuously displayed over the high base state and the warning effect is displayed in less than 10 seconds until the end of the big hit (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the big hit end demo), the big hit medium to high base state is displayed. It is desirable to configure it so that it is continuously displayed over the entire period.

In the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a predetermined prize (over prize or bonus prize described later) occurs, the number of prize balls given based on the prize in order to notify that the prize has occurred. (Number of unit prize balls) is displayed. In this prize ball acquisition display area 732, the number of prize balls acquired by the over prize when an over prize occurs (the number of unit prize balls acquired when one game ball is won in the large prize opening 54) is displayed. The first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the number of prize balls to be acquired by the bonus prize when a bonus prize is generated (the number of unit prize balls to be acquired when one game ball is won in the general prize opening 64). The second prize ball acquisition display area 732B to be displayed is included. For example, when an over prize occurs, "+15 pt" corresponding to the number of unit prize balls (15 pieces) of the large prize opening 54 is displayed, and when a bonus prize occurs, the unit prize of the general prize opening 64 is displayed. "+3pt" corresponding to the number of balls (3) is displayed. Further, as a modification, the position where the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B may be separated may be used.

In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired so far based on the fact that the game ball has entered the big prize opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the big hit game in the consecutive villas ( "Cumulative number of prize balls") is displayed. "Renso" is a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (at the time of the first hit). It is a state in which a big hit is continuously generated in a specific game state after the starting point). In addition, the "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than that of the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are high. It is a state in which at least one of the shortening function and the electric chew support function is activated (at least one of a high-probability high-base state, a low-probability high-base state, and a high-probability low-base state). In the present embodiment, at least the gaming state (high base state) in which the electric chew support function is operating corresponds to the "specific gaming state". The cumulative number of prize balls also includes the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game ball into the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the over-winning described later, or may not include the number of prize-balls given by the over-winning. Further, the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the bonus prize described later, or may not include the number of prize balls given by the bonus prize. .. The over-winning effect described later is executed because it is a big hit (it is possible because the big winning opening 54 is open and the ball can be entered), but the general winning opening 64 is in the big hit. It is possible to enter the ball with or without it. However, the bonus prize-winning effect, which will be described later, is also configured to be executed only during the big hit. Regarding the bonus prize, if it is a big hit, the bonus prize production will be executed, but if it is in a low probability low base state, a special production different from the bonus prize (for example, "Don't enter here now!" A special effect that displays and sounds is executed, but it may be generated when three balls are entered within a predetermined time (for example, within 5 seconds) instead of one ball), and the probability is high. If it is in the base state or the low probability high base state, neither the bonus winning effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, nothing needs to be executed, but as another effect, a red flame around the frame of the effect display device 70 May be performed to the extent that is generated for a moment).

In addition to this cumulative number of prize balls, or instead of the cumulative number of prize balls, the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in one big hit game currently being executed. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired so far (referred to as "the number of big hit middle prize balls") may be displayed. Since the number of big hit middle prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player can actually get during the execution of one big hit game, basically, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is set according to the big hit type (the number of prize balls that can be obtained. It may be less than the theoretical expected number of prize balls), but it will not exceed the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, when an over-prize, which will be described later, occurs, the number of big hit middle prize balls may exceed the number of winable prize balls (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the big hit type.

Further, although not shown, during the consecutive villas, the number of consecutive big hits in the specific game state, or the number of consecutive villas including the first hit (the number of times of adding one) is displayed. May be good. As an example, if a big hit is made three times in a specific game state after the first hit, a display such as "third consecutive villa" or "fourth consecutive villa" may be displayed during the big hit. Further, in each round of the special game, the pseudo decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo decorative symbol”) may be displayed in a variable manner and a stop display (temporary stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo-decorative symbol has a symbol mode (a symbol dedicated to the big hit) that is different from the normal decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed during the non-special game is composed of a pattern (character) and numbers, the decorative pattern is only numbers during the special game, and its size is also reduced. Or, if the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the non-special game is composed of only numbers, the decorative symbol with only the same numbers is reduced in size during the special game. Furthermore, when doublets such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned at the time of a big hit, "7, 7, 7" is displayed during the special game because it is only necessary to recognize which decorative pattern was used for the big hit. It is not necessary to display only "7" (only one decorative symbol, not a combination of three decorative symbols). Further, during the execution of the jackpot game (round game), the "winning-related effect", which is a characteristic effect of the present embodiment, is executed.

[Prize-related production]
Next, the winning-related production of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effect of the present embodiment. The winning-related effect is an effect executed based on the fact that the game ball enters a specific winning opening (large winning opening 54 or general winning opening 64) during the execution of the big hit game. This winning-related production includes (A) a large winning opening winning production and (B) a general winning opening winning production.

<A. Grand prize opening prize production ＞
The large winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball wins the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game. The large winning opening winning production includes a large winning opening normal winning production, a large winning opening over winning production, and a large winning opening count-up production. In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball wins the big winning opening 54, (b) the game ball enters the big winning opening 54, and (c) the game ball It is used synonymously with the fact that it is detected by the big prize opening switch 541 and (d) receiving the big winning opening winning command from the main control board 100.

<< A-1. Large prize opening Normal prize production ≫
The large winning opening normal winning effect is an effect of notifying that the game ball has won the large winning opening 54 for the winning of the game ball within the specified count number to the large winning opening 54. That is, the large winning opening normal winning effect is performed every time the game ball wins the large winning opening 54 until the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 54 in one round game reaches the specified count number. It will be a production. In the present embodiment, a specific example of the normal winning effect of the large winning opening is not specified, but at least one of a plurality of effect means such as the effect display device 70, the speaker 11, the effect lamp LP, and the movable accessory 24 is used. The big winning opening was usually a winning production. As an example, (1) display an object corresponding to the specified count number in one unit game (for example, display the treasure box display for the specified count number in one unit game), and play the game to the big winning opening 54. Each time a ball enters, the object is deleted by the effect display device 70. (2) A speaker that outputs a "chareen" sound each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening 54. Examples include the effect of 11 and (3) the effect of the effect lamp LP in which the lamp blinks twice each time the game ball enters the large winning opening 54. As a modification of this embodiment, only the large winning opening count-up effect, which will be described later, is applied to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 54 up to the specified count number without providing the large winning opening normal winning effect. It may be configured to be done.

≪A-2. Large prize opening over prize production ≫
The large winning opening over winning production (also called "over winning production") targets the winning of a game ball (over winning) that exceeds the specified count number for the large winning opening 54, and the game ball becomes the large winning opening 54. It is a production that suggests or informs that a prize has been won. "Over winning" means that a game ball exceeding the specified count number (in this embodiment, the 11th and subsequent game balls) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 during the execution of one round game. Say. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the effective detection period of the large winning opening switch 541 is the detection grace period after each round game is completed (in this embodiment, the same period as the interval period, but the interval period and detection period). The grace period may be different, and as an example, it is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo, and is closed from the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54. If the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the interval period, which is the end demo waiting time, is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is between each round game or the final round. It is a period set between the game and the big hit end demo, and it is possible to detect the entry of the game ball after the big winning opening 54 starts the closing operation (such as the entry of the game ball exceeding the specified count number). The detection grace period, which is the period during which the detection is performed, may be set to 1 second after the large winning opening 54 starts the closing operation, or may be set to 3 seconds, while at least partially overlapping the interval period. It may be set until the elapse of), and over-winning may occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of over-winning, when the 10th count game ball enters the large winning opening 54 and is detected by the large winning opening switch 541, the closing operation of the large winning opening 54 is started. If the subsequent game ball (game ball after the 11th count) has entered the large winning opening 54 before the winning opening 54 is closed, this subsequent game ball (game after the 11th count) An over-winning occurs when the ball) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period).

The types of over-winning effects include over-winning image display effects and over-winning sound output effects. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the over-winning effect of the present embodiment. In addition, it is preferable that the production mode of the over-winning effect is different from the production mode of the above-mentioned large winning opening normal winning effect. Further, as a modification, as an effect related to the over-winning, only the over-winning image may be installed (the over-winning sound is not installed), or only the over-winning sound may be installed (the over-winning image is not installed).

The over-winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as an "over-winning image") suggesting that an over-winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-winning image having the characters "+15pt" is displayed as an over-winning image in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "15" are displayed based on the occurrence of the over-winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that the over-winning has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“over-winning sound”) suggesting that an over-winning has occurred from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the sound effect (character voice) of "I did it" is output from the speaker 11, which suggests that the over-winning has occurred.

As a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for over-winning effects may be provided. That is, even if a plurality of types of over-winning images or a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are prepared and one of the over-winning images and the over-winning sounds is selected by the staging lottery when the over-winning occurs. good. In that case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or the over-winning sound, the pending continuous suggestion, the probability change suggestion, the round number suggestion, and the like may be performed. As an example, there is only one type of over-winning image, "+15pt", while there are other over-winning sounds such as "good", "its tone", and "congratulations" in addition to "done". Above all, when the over-winning sound of "Congratulations" occurs, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion for the pending ream, and (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a probable change jackpot. , (3) It may also serve to suggest that the currently executed jackpot is not a 4R jackpot but a 16R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are set, and in addition to the over-winning, the pending inner villa is generated according to the type of the over-winning sound. You may adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility of (that is, both the over-winning effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect). Here, the "reserved inner villa" is related to the preceding operation-reserved ball when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding operation-reserved ball is a big hit. It is planned that a big hit will be made in one or more subsequent operation holding balls existing at a predetermined timing from the time when the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is permitted to the end of the special game executed by the big hit. It means that the operation holding ball (also referred to as "big hit holding") is included. In this modification, as a plurality of types of over-winning sounds, an over-winning sound A (voice of "done") and an over-winning sound B (voice of "Congratulations") are prepared. If there is no jackpot hold when the over-winning occurs (when the holding in-house consecutive villa is not established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "0%". ". On the other hand, if there is a big hit hold when the over-winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "100%". ". That is, the over-winning sound A is a normal mode sound suggesting that over-winning has occurred and that the pending villa has not been established. The over-winning sound B is a special mode of sound suggesting that an over-winning has occurred and that the pending villa has been established. The selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B may be set as appropriate. For example, when there is a big hit hold when the over winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the over winning sound A The selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "80%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "20%". Further, in the above modification, the case where the hold continuous suggestion effect is applied to the over-winning sound output effect is illustrated and described, but the hold continuous suggestion effect may be applied to the over-winning image display effect (for example, over-winning). If "+15pt" is displayed in black characters as an image display effect, it is unlikely that the reserved inner villa has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold characters, the reserved inner villa has not been established. The specifications may be such that the villa has been established or is likely to be established). Further, in the above modification, the over-winning sound B as a pending continuous suggestion has been described, but the over-winning sound B may be a specification having a role of probabilistic change suggestion or round number suggestion, and in that case, it is currently executed. Depending on whether the jackpot being a normal jackpot is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is set, and in the case of the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%". , The selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "100" in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot). % ”Or, the selection rate of the over winning sound A may be“ 80% ”, and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be“ 20% ”. Therefore, when the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%". In the case of, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "80%" and the selection of the over winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

Further, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, when the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). , The hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the over prize generated during the execution of the special game as an opportunity. In addition, on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), the specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the over-winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the big hit hold (the earliest big hit hold if there are multiple big hit holds) is a low profit big hit, it is held. It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. That is, if the hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definite that the hold inner consecutive villa is held with a high profit big hit (16R big hit).

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, it may be suggested that the over-winning effect may have resulted in the over-winning and the possibility of winning the probabilistic jackpot. That is, the over-winning effect and the probability change suggestion effect may be combined. The probability change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probability change jackpot), that is, the transition to the probability change game state after the end of the special game. Is. In this modification, for example, when a plurality of types of over winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "70%", and the over winning sound is over. The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "0%". If the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "over winning sound A" <"over winning sound B" <"over winning sound C", the probability change expectation degree (the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change gaming state) increases by one step. As a further modification, the over-winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support given after the end of the special game, instead of the probability change expectation.

<< A-3. Grand prize opening count-up production ≫
The large prize opening count-up effect is the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of the special game in the consecutive villa. This is an effect of adding and displaying the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening. In the present embodiment, since one game ball is inserted into the large prize opening 54 to pay out "15" prize balls (the number of unit prize balls in the large winning opening 54 is 15), the game is played. When a ball enters the large winning opening 54, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of "15". Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball number counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the large winning opening 54 (from the main control board 100). (Every time a winning command is received), "15", which is the unit prize number of the large winning opening 54, is added to the count value of the cumulative winning number counter, and the cumulative winning number display area 733 is correspondingly added. A large winning opening count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the displayed cumulative number of prize balls. This large winning opening count-up effect is performed regardless of whether the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 is within the specified count number or exceeds the specified count number. Is.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a continuous example of a large winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 20, the large prize opening count-up effect is applied to the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when a game ball is entered into the large prize opening 54. This is an effect in which the number of prize balls given based on the entry of game balls into the large prize opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up and displayed one by one, such as "7000"-> "7001"-> ...-> "7014"-> "7015". Note that FIG. 20 shows the flow of the large winning opening count-up effect when an over-winning occurs, and after the over-winning effect is performed in (A) in the figure, (B) to (B) in the figure. At E), a big prize opening count-up production is performed. FIG. 20 shows the large winning opening count-up effect when the over-winning effect is performed. Is done. In addition, a large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a game ball within the specified count number (especially, a large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number) is being performed. If an over-winning occurs when the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for the large winning opening count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed is completed. After that (after the count for 15 balls is performed), it is desirable that the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over winning is started. Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the large winning opening count-up production itself corresponding to the over-winning starts in the next round (after the interval period elapses). Although it overlaps with the execution period of the next round), the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning performed during the execution of the next round (the next round starting after the interval period has elapsed) Even if there is a ball in the big winning opening 54 during execution, the counting up for 15 balls is still completed because the winning timing is in the middle of the big winning opening count-up production corresponding to the over winning. If not, the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet. After all the count-ups for the winning opening count-up effect have been completed (after the count-up for 15 balls has been performed), the large prize in the next round It is desirable that the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 54 is started.

As a modification of this embodiment, when an over-prize occurs during the execution of a special game, the over-prize effect is executed, and the number of prize balls given based on the over-prize is used as the cumulative number of prize balls. It may be configured not to display the addition. That is, for the cumulative number of prize balls, the number of prize balls given based on the entry of game balls within the specified count number to the large prize opening 54 is subject to the addition display, and the specified count number to the large winning opening 54 is used. The number of prize balls given based on the excess number of game balls may be configured not to be subject to the addition display.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the specified count number is exceeded during the execution of the special game performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal game state). Even if an over-winning event occurs, the over-winning effect may not be executed. In addition, as the types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games), and the specified number of counts is exceeded during the execution of the high-profit special games. An over-winning effect may be executed when a winning is generated, and the over-winning effect may not be executed even if an over-winning exceeding the specified count number occurs during the execution of the low-profit special game. Further, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. And a short open round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. Even if an over-winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the open round game, an over-winning effect is executed, and even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the short open round game. It may be configured not to execute the over-winning effect. In addition, during the execution of the special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won, an over-winning effect is executed when an over-winning that exceeds the specified count number occurs, and a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) During the execution of the special game performed when the player is elected, the over-winning effect may not be executed even if the over-winning exceeding the specified count number occurs.

<B. General prize opening prize production ＞
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening 64. The general winning opening winning production includes a general winning opening normal winning production and a general winning opening count-up production.

<< B-1. General winning opening Normal winning production ≫
The general winning opening normal winning effect (also referred to as “bonus winning effect”) is an effect that suggests or notifies that the game ball has won the general winning opening 64. In the following, the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game is also referred to as "bonus prize", but the game ball wins the general prize except during the execution of the special game (non-special game state). You may win a prize in the mouth 64 or you may call it a "bonus prize".

Types of bonus prize-winning effects include bonus-winning image display effects and bonus-winning sound output effects. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the bonus winning effect of the present embodiment. Further, as a modification, as an effect related to the bonus winning prize, only the bonus winning image may be installed (the bonus winning sound is not installed), or only the bonus winning sound may be installed (the bonus winning image is not installed). It should be noted that this bonus winning effect is configured to be executed even during the execution of the round game or even when the big winning opening 54 during the big hit is closed (during the interval period), and the big hit is in progress. If the large winning opening 54 is closed (during the interval period), it is configured so that it can be executed at the same time as the over winning effect.

The bonus winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as a "bonus winning image") suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a bonus winning image with the characters "+3pt" is displayed as a bonus winning image in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "3" are displayed based on the occurrence of the bonus winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that the bonus prize has occurred.

The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“bonus winning sound”) suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, it is suggested that the bonus prize is generated by outputting the sound effect "picon" from the speaker 11.

As a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for the bonus winning effect may be provided. That is, even if a plurality of types of bonus winning images or a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are prepared and one of the bonus winning images and the bonus winning sound is selected by the staging lottery when the bonus winning occurs. good. In that case, depending on the type of the bonus winning image or the bonus winning sound, a hold continuous suggestion, a probability change suggestion, a round number suggestion, or the like may be performed. As an example, there is only one type of bonus winning image, "+3pt", while there are "Gachan", "Chine", and "Dokhan" as bonus winning sounds in addition to "Picon". When the bonus winning sound "" is generated, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion for the pending ream, (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, (3). ) It may also serve to suggest that the currently executed jackpot is not a 4R jackpot but a 16R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the bonus winning sound being generated, a reserved inner villa is generated according to the type of the bonus winning sound. You may adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that the bonus is awarded (that is, the bonus winning effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect are used together). In this modification, as a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds, a bonus winning sound A (sound effect "picon") and a bonus winning sound B (sound effect "Dokhan") are prepared. Then, if there is no jackpot hold when the bonus prize is generated (when the hold inner consecutive villa is not established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%". ". On the other hand, if there is a big hit hold at the time of the bonus winning (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%". ". That is, the bonus winning sound A is a normal mode sound suggesting that the bonus winning has occurred and the pending villa has not been established. The bonus winning sound B is a special mode of sound suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that the reserved inner villa has been established. In addition, if there is a big hit hold at the time of the bonus winning (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "20%". May be. In the modified example, the case where the hold consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the bonus winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the hold consecutive suggestion effect may be applied to the bonus winning image display effect (for example, the bonus winning image). If "+3pt" is displayed in black as a display effect, it is unlikely that the reserved inner villa has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold characters, the reserved inner villa has not been established. It may be a specification that holds or is likely to hold). Further, in the above modification, the bonus winning sound B as a pending consecutive suggestion has been described, but the bonus winning sound B may be a specification having a role of probabilistic change suggestion or round number suggestion, and in that case, it is currently executed. Depending on whether the jackpot being a normal jackpot is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is set, and in the case of the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%". The selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100" in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot). % ”Or, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A may be“ 80% ”, and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B may be“ 20% ”. Therefore, when the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is 16R jackpot. In the case of, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

Further, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, when the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). , The hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the bonus winning prize generated during the execution of the special game as an opportunity. In addition, on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), the specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the bonus winning prize generated during the execution of the special game as an opportunity. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the big hit hold (the earliest big hit hold if there are multiple big hit holds) is a low profit big hit, it is held. It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. That is, if the hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definite that the hold inner consecutive villa is held with a high profit big hit (16R big hit).

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, it may be suggested that the bonus winning effect may have been won in addition to the bonus winning effect. That is, the bonus winning effect and the probability change suggestion effect may be combined. The probability change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probability change jackpot), that is, the transition to the probability change game state after the end of the special game. Is. In this modification, for example, when a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "70%", and the bonus winning sound The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "0%". If the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "bonus winning sound A" <"bonus winning sound B" <"bonus winning sound C", the probability change expectation degree (the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change gaming state) increases by one step. As a further modification, the bonus winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support given after the end of the special game, instead of the probability change expectation.

≪General winning opening count-up production≫
The general prize opening count-up effect is applied to the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when the game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the execution of the special game in the consecutive villa. This is an effect of adding and displaying the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general prize opening 64. In the present embodiment, since one game ball is inserted into the general prize opening 64 to pay out "three" prize balls (the number of unit prize balls in the general winning opening 64 is three), the game is played. When a ball enters the general winning opening 64, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of "3". Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball count counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls described above, and each time a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (mainly). (Every time a general winning opening winning command is received from the control board 100), "3" corresponding to the unit winning ball number of the general winning opening 64 is added to the count value of the cumulative winning ball counter, and the cumulative winning ball is correspondingly added. A general winning opening count-up effect is performed in which "3" is added and displayed to the value of the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the number display area 733.

Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing a continuous example of a general winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 22, the general winning opening count-up effect is the current value of the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative winning opening number display area 733 when a game ball is entered into the general winning opening 54. In addition, the value of the number of unit prize balls given based on the entry of the game ball into the general prize opening 64 is added and displayed by "1" in order in the count-up format. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up and displayed one by one, such as "8000"-> "8001"-> "8002"-> "8003".

The general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is the general winning opening 64 provided in the right area PA2 of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game. It is performed for the entry of a game ball into. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 provided in the left side region PA1 among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game, the general winning opening winning effect is performed. I can't. However, if the game ball enters any of the general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game, regardless of the type of the general winning openings 61 to 64 (regardless of whether or not the general winning opening winning effect is executed). The prize balls (3 pieces) based on the prizes of the game balls to the general prize openings 61 to 64 will be paid out.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given by the bonus prize is added to the cumulative number of prize balls each time one bonus prize is generated. The number of prize balls based on all bonus prizes generated during the execution of one round game (number of unit prize balls x number of bonus prizes during one round game) is not limited to that of the round game. It may be configured to be added to the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the game, or the number of prize balls based on all the bonus prizes generated during the execution of one special game (number of unit prize balls x 1 time). The number of bonus prizes during the special game) may be collectively displayed in addition to the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the final round game or at the end of the special game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a board configuration is adopted in which the general winning opening 64 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting opening 51, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the general winning opening 64 is the second. A board surface configuration may be adopted that is arranged on the downstream side of the starting port 51. In that case, the general winning opening 64 may be arranged on the upstream side of the large winning opening 54, or the general winning opening 64 may be arranged on the downstream side of the large winning opening 54.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also be used as the operating opening (operating gate 53) that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery. That is, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting opening 52 is performed, and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) is performed. The prize ball may be configured to be paid out.

In addition, as described above, in the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning opening count-up effect), a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the currently executing game state is a special gaming state. Since the production is performed with this as an opportunity, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the currently executing game state is a non-special gaming state, the general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production, general) Winning opening count-up production) will not be performed. That is, even if the currently executing game state is a game state (non-electric support state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, the currently executing game state displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Even in the game state (electric support state), which is the main body of the game, the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is performed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. I can't. If the currently executing game state is a game state (electric support state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game, the screen is assumed to be in the continuous villa state even now. In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the above, the cumulative prize ball number (cumulative prize ball number at the end of the latest special game) acquired in the special game in the consecutive villa is displayed. However, in this electric support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game during the consecutive villas is displayed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the number of prize balls is the cumulative prize. It is not added to the number of balls (the general prize opening count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the cumulative prize balls does not change (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game is maintained).

Further, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game performed by the first hit (the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal game state). , The bonus winning effect may not be executed. Further, as the types of special games, there are high profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low profit special games (for example, 4R special games), and during the execution of the high profit special games, the game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 64. The bonus winning effect may be executed by entering the ball, and the bonus winning effect may not be executed even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the low profit special game. Further, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. And a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. Even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the open round game, the bonus winning effect is executed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the short open round game. It may be configured not to execute the bonus prize-winning effect. In addition, during the execution of the special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won, a bonus prize-winning effect is executed by the game ball entering the general winning opening 64, and the normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). During the execution of the special game performed when the player is elected, the bonus winning effect may not be executed even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64.

<Other features of prize-related production>
Next, other features of the large winning opening winning effect and the general winning opening winning effect of the present embodiment will be described. Since the large winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect are effects on the same display object (cumulative winning number of balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733), the large winning opening count is described below. The up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect may be collectively referred to as "count-up effect".

≪Count-up production time≫
In the present embodiment, the time for counting up for one prize ball (the time required for counting up from "N" to "N + 1") is set to "0.03 seconds". That is, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the large winning opening count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit) given by one game ball entering the large winning opening 54 in the time value required for counting up for one prize ball. Derived by multiplying the value of (number of prize balls), the execution time of the large winning opening count-up effect is "15 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". Will be. Similarly, in the general prize opening count-up effect, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) given by one game ball entering the general winning opening 64 in the time value required for counting up for one prize ball. Derived by multiplying the value of (number), the execution time of the general prize opening count-up effect is "3 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds". .. In the following, for convenience, the execution time of the large winning opening count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one large winning opening count-up effect) is referred to as "count-up effect time A", and the general winning opening count-up is performed. The execution time of the effect (the time value from the start to the end of one general winning opening count-up effect) is abbreviated as "count-up effect time B". Here, the big winning opening normal winning effect, over winning effect, and bonus winning effect are configured not to be executed even during the execution of the special game, during the execution of the big hit start demo and the execution of the big hit end demo. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect are not executed even during the execution of the special game, during the execution of the big hit start demo and the execution of the big hit end demo. ing.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 1)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as “interval period”) set after the end of each round game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo, and is the period during which the closing operation of the big winning opening 54 is maintained from the start. The game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the end demo waiting time. In the present embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds", which is common to all round games. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is set to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball is placed in the large winning opening 54 just before the end of a certain round game. Even if the large winning opening count-up effect is performed based on entering the ball, the large winning opening count-up effect will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the big prize opening count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demo (if the over prize is won, the interval period may be exceeded). (There is a possibility), the division between each round game or the division between the final round game and the jackpot end demo can be clarified.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 2)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. As described above, the count-up production time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" common to all jackpot types (big hit medium production). ing. The execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the last round game in the special game elapses to the end of the special game. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final round game, the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as a target for paying out the winning ball, and it is determined that the ball is illegally entered. It is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the round game that may be detected), but the execution time of the big hit end demo is such that the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for a game (effect mode) after the end of a special game separated from the round game, which is unlikely to be effectively detected. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the game ball is just before the end of the final round game. Even if the big winning opening count-up effect is performed based on entering the big winning opening 54, further, even if an over-winning occurs in the final round game, the final round Even after the big prize opening 54 is closed after the game (even during the big hit end demo period), if the specifications are such that the big winning opening count-up effect is performed, the big winning opening count will be counted within the big hit end demo period. The up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The delimiter can be clarified. As a modification, for at least a part of the execution time of the jackpot end demo, the entry of the game ball into the jackpot 54 may be effectively detected within that time.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 3)
In the present embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 in one round game, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts in this one round game (1). The big winning opening count-up production for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all big hit types (big hit medium production). In the present embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the final round Even if a plurality of large winning opening count-up effects are continuously performed based on a plurality of gaming balls entering the large winning opening 54 in succession just before the end of the round game, the final round Even after the big prize opening 54 is closed after the round game (even during the big hit end demo period), if the specifications are such that the big winning opening count-up effect is performed, the big winning opening will be within the big hit end demo period. The count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The delimiter can be clarified.

In addition, even when the game ball exceeds the specified count number and enters the large winning opening 54 in one round game (when an over-winning occurs), the cumulative number of counts in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A (prescribed count number + over-winning number) is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. That is, the time obtained by adding the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up production time A for the number of over-winnings is after the end of the round game. By setting it shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, even after the jackpot 54 is closed after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot count-up effect is produced. Even if an over-winning occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect is ended within the execution time of the big hit end demo, and the special game ends and the variable display starts. It is preferable to clarify. The number of over prizes is undefined because it depends on the progress of the game (the launch status of the game ball and the flow status of the game ball), but even if it is assumed that the number of over prizes is 10 which is the same as the specified count number. It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up production time A for the number of over prizes are added together. The time is 4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds, which is 9 seconds, which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, which is 20 seconds).

(Relationship of count-up production time A 4)
As a modification of this embodiment, when a game ball having a specified count number enters the large winning opening 54 in one round game, the total count-up production time A for the specified count number in this one round game is totaled. The time may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modification, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) of the above-described embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common to all round games. In this modification, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that a certain round game ends. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the big prize 54 in succession just before the end of the round game, even if a plurality of big prize opening count-up effects are continuously performed, within the interval time after the end of the round game. The big prize opening count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the big prize opening count-up effect is not performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demo, and the break between each round game or the final round game and the big hit end demo. The break between can be clarified.

In addition, even when the game ball exceeds the specified count number and only one ball is entered into the large winning opening 54 in one round game (when only one over winning occurs), this one round game is also performed. It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A for the cumulative number of counts (specified count number + 1 over-winning number) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. That is, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts in one round game and the count-up production time A for one over prize (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4). .95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so that even if an over-winning occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect will end within the interval period. , It is preferable to clarify the division between round games.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 5)
As a modification of this embodiment, when a game ball having a specified count number (full count) enters the large winning opening 54 in all round games of one special game, the number of full counts generated during the execution of this special game. The total time of the count-up effect time A of minutes (specified number of rounds × specified number of counts) may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In this modification, when the specified number of rounds of one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), the game balls enter the large winning opening by the specified count number (10 balls) in all round games. In this case, a total of 160 large winning opening count-up effects are executed. Therefore, the total time of the count-up effect time A for all the counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified number of rounds) = 72 seconds". be. On the other hand, in this modification, the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "120 seconds", which is common to all big hit types (big hit medium production). In this modification, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up production time A for all the counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demo. , Even after the big prize opening 54 is closed after the final round game (even during the big hit end demo period), if the specification is to perform the big winning opening count-up effect, go to the big winning opening 54. Even if the execution of the big prize opening count-up effect is congested during the round game or during the interval period due to the continuous winning of the game balls, all the big prize opening count-up effects must be completed at least by the end of the big hit end demo. Is guaranteed, so it is possible to smoothly proceed with the production during the big hit.

≪Priority of the big winning opening count-up production after the future≫
FIG. 23 is a time chart used to explain the priority of the large winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 23, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) continuously enter the large winning opening 54 during the execution of a certain round game, 2 based on the continuous winning. The big winning opening count-up production will be executed. Specifically, when the execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied by the first game ball entering the large winning opening 54, the previous large winning opening count-up effect is executed. Similarly, when the execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied by the second game ball winning the large winning opening 54, the later large winning opening count-up effect is executed. The execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is a condition for starting the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect, and the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game (large winning opening). It is established when the entry of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 541). At this time, if the execution condition of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous grand prize opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous grand prize opening count-up effect is in progress. After the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started without stopping at. That is, in the present embodiment, the priority of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is set higher than the priority of the later large winning opening count-up effect among the two large winning opening count-up effects. Before the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is not started, and the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed. After that, the execution of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is started. If the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the earlier large winning opening count-up effect and the later large winning opening count-up effect are started. It is preferable to continuously (seamlessly) connect the staging and continuously count up the large winning openings for two times. However, as a modification, after a predetermined time (minute time) has elapsed after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started. A clear delimiter may be provided between the large winning opening count-up effect and the later large winning opening count-up effect. Here, the large winning opening count-up effect has been explained, but the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specifications, and the execution condition of the later general winning opening count-up effect during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect. If is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is not interrupted in the middle, and after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed, the later general winning opening count-up is performed. It is preferable to configure it to start the execution of the effect. In addition, if the execution conditions for the later general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is in the middle. It is preferable to configure the system so that the execution of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed without interruption. In addition, if the execution conditions for the later large winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is in the middle. It is preferable to configure the system so that the execution of the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed without interruption.

As a modification of this embodiment, if the execution condition of the later large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is performed. It may be interrupted and configured to start the execution of the next big winning opening count-up effect. That is, the priority of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is higher than the priority of the earlier grand prize opening count-up effect. In that case, when the execution of the previous big winning opening count-up effect is interrupted, the count value is forcibly set to the final value of the previous large winning opening count-up effect or the initial value of the later large winning opening count-up effect. It is preferable to switch to and start the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect from that point. In this modification, the large winning opening count-up effect was explained, but the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specifications, and during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the general winning opening count-up effect will be performed later. When the execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning opening count-up effect may be started. In addition, if the execution conditions for the later general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is interrupted and the next general winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to start the execution of the mouth count-up effect. In addition, if the execution conditions for the later general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is interrupted and the next large winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to start the execution of the mouth count-up effect.

(Emphasis on the cumulative number of prize balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the emphasis staging of the present embodiment. (A) in the figure shows the case where the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect, and (B) in the figure shows the case where the bonus prize-winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect. In the present embodiment, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villa is set to a predetermined specific value when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. When it reaches, the emphasis effect is configured to notify that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value. The specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000). That is, every time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value (10,000 pieces, 20,000 pieces, 30,000 pieces ...) of the predetermined number of prize balls, the emphasis effect is performed. Therefore, the highlighting effect may be referred to as a specific value reaching effect, and the highlighting effect may be referred to as a specific value corresponding display. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value due to the over prize or the bonus prize, the emphasis effect is executed, and in that case, the emphasis effect and the over prize are performed. The production or the bonus prize-winning production is executed in duplicate.

As shown in FIG. 24, the types of highlighting effects include a highlighting effect that enlarges and displays a specific value (“20,000 pt” in the illustrated example) that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached in the highlighting area 735 in the center of the screen, and a speaker. There is an emphasis sound output effect that outputs a special sound (sound of "excellent tone" in the illustrated example) from No. 11.

The highlighting of the specific value is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), during which the cumulative prize ball number display is updated (addition display) by the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. ), The highlighting is not updated (additional display). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of "cumulative prize ball number display"<"highlightdisplay"<"rounddisplay". The “layer” means each layer of the hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image constituting the whole image. The higher the display priority, the higher the layer (front side when viewed from the player), and the lower the display priority, the lower layer (rear side when viewed from the player). Will be done. In FIG. 24, the highlighting and the cumulative prize ball number display are shown in a form in which they are not superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed to further emphasize the highlighting. In that case, the above priority is given. Therefore, the highlighting may be displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number display (the highlighting may be displayed so as to cover a part or all of the cumulative prize ball number display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the prize ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas, and when an over prize or a bonus prize occurs during the execution of the highlight display, the prize ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas. , The enhanced image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed in parallel at the same time. When displaying the emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image at the same time, even if the display priority of the emphasized image is higher than that of the over-winning image or the bonus winning image, the over-winning image is higher than the emphasized image. Alternatively, the priority of displaying the bonus winning image may be increased. In FIG. 24, the highlighting and the over-winning image / bonus winning image are shown in a form in which they are not superimposed and displayed. However, in order to further emphasize the highlighting, the display area may be enlarged and superimposed and displayed. Depending on the priority, the highlighting may be displayed in front of the over winning image / bonus winning image (the highlighting may be displayed covering a part or all of the over winning image / bonus winning image).

Further, when an over prize is generated during the output of the special sound, the over prize sound or the bonus prize sound is output in duplicate during the output of the special sound. If the special sound and the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound overlap, the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be set to a lower volume than the volume of the special sound having a high priority, and vice versa. Therefore, the sound of the special sound may be set to a lower volume than the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound having a high priority. In that case, the volume with the lower priority (the volume with the lower priority) may be substantially set to "0".

≪Over-winning production when an error occurs / Bonus winning production≫
In the present embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, it is configured to control whether or not the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed according to the error type. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining the error types of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the error types that occur in the game machine are "door / frame opening error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", "excessive winning error", and "payout error". ] Etc. are set. The above error types are examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.

The door / frame opening error is a door opening switch that detects the opening of the glass frame 5 and the opening of the front frame 2 when the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 or the back set board 30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1. This is an error that occurs when the frame opening switch or the back set opening switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 is disconnected or malfunctions. This door / frame opening error is canceled when it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the gaming machine and the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 and the back set board 30 are closed.

The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are errors that occur when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when the radio wave sensor detects radio waves, and when the magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor is disconnected, short-circuited, or malfunctions. The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are cleared when the gaming machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when a disconnection, a short circuit, or a failure occurs in the radio wave sensor and various switches provided on the surface of the game board. The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is cleared when the gaming machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The excess winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball is excessively entered into various winning openings. The excessive winning error is canceled when the gaming machine is checked for any abnormality and the power is turned on again. Here, the excess winning error includes an excessive winning error of the large winning opening 54 (also referred to as a "large winning opening excessive winning error") and an excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 64 ("general winning opening excessive winning error"). ”) Etc. are included. For example, the large winning opening excess winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 during the execution of one round game. The general winning opening excess winning error occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of a game ball enters the general winning opening 61 to 63 per unit time (for example, 30 seconds), or per unit time (for example, 30 seconds). This is an error that occurs when a specific number (for example, 60 balls) of a game ball enters the general winning opening 64. Since the general winning opening 64 is arranged so that the game ball is easier to enter than the general winning opening 61 to 63, the general winning opening 64 has an error judgment value (error and error) based on the number of balls entered per unit time. The value of the number of game balls to be determined) is a value with a margin. In the present embodiment, when an error of excessive winning of the large winning opening occurs, or when the ball is entered into the large winning opening 54 in a state where the large winning opening 54 is not open (during non-special game), that is, When an abnormal winning of the large winning opening 54 is detected (when it is determined that the winning is abnormal), the external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, when an excessive winning error occurs in the general winning opening, that is, when an abnormal winning in the general winning openings 61 to 64 is detected (when it is determined to be an abnormal winning), an error occurs from the external information terminal board 600. Does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that it has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board 600 will be described later.

The payout error is an error that occurs when the payout of the prize ball is hindered. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball plate 9 is full with a game ball (full tank switch is on), a ball biting / jamming error in the prize ball payout unit 34, and a game ball is replenished from the game island. Includes ballless errors that cannot be completed and are insufficient. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. The notification level 1 is a level in which the on state continues for 30 seconds after the full tank switch is turned on. At the notification level 1, only the voice notification "Please pull out the ball" is executed. At this notification level 1, even if there is a ball entering the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is not restricted (the prize ball payout is not stopped). When the on state exceeds 30 seconds, the notification level shifts to 2, and not only the voice notification "Please pull out the ball" but also the "image prompting the ball removal of the lower ball plate" is displayed on the effect display device 70. Furthermore, even if there is a ball entering the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is restricted (the prize ball payout is stopped). As a modification, the specification may be such that only image notification is performed at the notification level 1, and both image notification and voice notification are performed at the notification level 2. Regarding the ball biting / jamming error of the prize ball payout unit 34 and the ballless error in which the game ball cannot be replenished from the game island, even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, Prize ball payout is restricted (prize ball payout is stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, various errors are classified into "first error", "second error", and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. The first error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a medium level. The first error includes a "door / frame opening error". The second error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a high level. The second error includes "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", and "excessive winning error". The third error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a low level. The third error includes a "payout error".

Here, when the above error occurs in the gaming machine, image effect, sound effect, etc. are performed as various error notifications, and specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Then, an error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at an error volume. As a modification of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to blink at the brightness for the error.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine becomes the first error (door / frame opening error), even if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs, a part of the over prize effect or a part of the bonus prize effect is performed. It is configured so that it will not be damaged. That is, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, it is permissible to execute the over-winning image display effect and the bonus-winning image display effect among the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect, but the over-winning sound output effect and the bonus-winning sound output effect and Execution of bonus winning sound output production is restricted. Even if an over-winning or extra-winning occurs during the first error, do not overlook that the gaming machine is in the first error state because part of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect is not performed. It has become. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is permitted. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed in order to notify that the first error has occurred, but it is not displayed on the full screen. , Display using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over-winning image and the bonus winning image, but all of them can be displayed at the same time, and the count-up effect can be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound for notifying that it is the first error is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). If an over-winning or bonus winning is generated when the gaming machine is in the first error state, the prize balls are paid out based on the over-winning or the bonus winning.

In addition, if the gaming machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short-circuit power supply error, excessive winning error), even if over-winning or bonus winning occurs, over-winning or bonus-winning effect It is configured so that all of the above are not done. That is, when a second error occurs in the gaming machine, the execution of both the over-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect is restricted as the over-winning effect, and the bonus-winning image display effect and the bonus-winning sound output effect are restricted. Both executions of the bonus sound output production are restricted. Even if an over-winning or the like occurs during the second error, it is not overlooked that the gaming machine is in the second error state because all the over-winning effects and the like are not performed. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also restricted. Specifically, when a second error occurs, an error image indicating that the second error has occurred is displayed on the full screen in order to notify that the second error has occurred, so that an over-winning image or a bonus is displayed. The winning image and the count-up effect are not displayed. Further, while the error notification sound for notifying that the second error is being output is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output. If the over-winning or bonus winning is generated when the gaming machine is in the second error state, the prize balls are paid out based on the over-winning or the bonus winning.

In addition, even if the gaming machine becomes a third error (payout error) and it becomes impossible to pay out the prize balls, if an over-winning or bonus winning occurs, an over-winning effect or bonus will be given. It is configured to perform a winning effect. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk of any particular trouble even if the game is continued, and there is no risk that the player will suffer any disadvantage. This is because limiting the production may rather reduce the interest of the game. In this case, the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also executed. However, if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs when the gaming machine is in the third error state, the prize ball based on this over prize or the bonus prize will not be paid out.

In the present embodiment, when an over-winning or bonus winning is generated when the gaming machine is "specific error" in this way, a part or all of the over-winning effect is performed according to the error type in which the over-winning or bonus winning is generated. In addition to being limited, it is configured to limit part or all of the bonus prize-winning production. That is, when the first error occurs among the specific errors, the execution of one or a part of the element effects (over-winning sound output effect) of the over-winning effect is restricted, and the second error occurs. When it occurs, the execution of a plurality or all element effects (over-winning sound output effect, over-winning image display effect, etc.) of the over-winning effect is restricted. This is because, in the present embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. A specific error may be used as an error type in which the progress of the game is prohibited. In addition, a specific error may be used as an error type that occurs when an abnormality suspected of being fraudulent (goto) is detected. Further, a specific error may be used as an error type that can be resolved by turning off / on the power again.

As a modification of this embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect to be higher than that of the over-winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is output with priority over the over-winning sound (for example, the over-winning sound). The error notification sound may be set to have a higher voice level than the over-winning sound), and the error notification image may be displayed with priority over the over-winning image (for example, the error notification image has priority over the over-winning image). The degree may be set high).

≪Over prize production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over-winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. For each round game, a detection valid period (large winning opening valid period) in which the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 541 is valid is set. This detection valid period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball entered immediately before the large winning opening 54 is closed to reach the large winning opening switch 541. In the present embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from the opening of the large winning opening 54 to the closing) and the end of the round game (the large winning opening 54 is closed). The detection valid period of the grand prize opening switch 541 is set over the entire period including the interval period until the predetermined time elapses. By setting this detection valid period from the round period to the interval period, even if the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the round period ends, the large winning opening 54 The prize for the game ball is treated as valid (subject to the payout of the prize ball). That is, the "round game execution period (large winning opening opening period)" and the above-mentioned "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as continuous detection valid periods. Further, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In the present embodiment, the period of the interval period is set as an over-winning effect permissible period in which the execution of the over-winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives. On the other hand, outside the interval period, even if the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives, the over-winning effect is prohibited from being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the game balls exceeding the specified count number by the large winning opening switch 541 (11 in the illustrated example). When the game ball of the eye) is detected and the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives within this interval period, the execution of the over-winning effect within this interval period is permitted. However, if the production time of the over-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, all the over-winning effects are executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over-winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if an over-winning image and an over-winning sound are provided as an over-winning effect, the over-winning image may be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the over-winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, as with the over-winning effect, the large winning opening count-up effect may be executed with the over-winning within the interval period as a trigger. In that case, the interval period ends from the execution start timing of the large winning opening count-up effect. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big prize opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26B, a game ball that exceeds the specified count number by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the final round game (the eleventh game in the illustrated example). Even if a ball) is detected, if the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the lapse of this interval period, the over-winning effect is executed within this jackpot end demo period. Is prohibited. However, during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the over-winning effect is only prohibited, and the prize balls will be paid out based on this over-winning. Further, in the above case, the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as well as the over-winning effect.

As a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period is set as the over-winning effect permissible period in which the execution of the over-winning effect is permitted, and the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. You may. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the big hit end demo period as the over-winning effect allowable period. As an example, out of the 20 seconds of the big hit end demo period, only the first 5 seconds is set as the over-winning effect permissible period, and the subsequent 15 seconds is set as the over-winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, the over-winning effect permissible period and the over-winning effect prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round. As an example, the first 1.5 of the interval period of 2 seconds may be set. Seconds may be set as an over-winning effect permissible period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be set as an over-winning effect prohibition period, and the subsequent jackpot end demo period may also be set as an over-winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, considering that the timing when the game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 and the execution timing of the over winning effect are synchronized, the final round. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, the over winning effect is always executed (at the end timing of the interval period). (Excluding the entry of the ball), as described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the effect time of the over-winning effect, the interval period Based on the end, the over-winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period. (Hide or erase from the middle), the over winning sound may be output without interruption), and when the game ball is detected in the big winning opening 54 during the big hit end demo period ( (When a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541) may be configured so that the over winning effect is not executed. In that case, the large winning opening count-up effect is also the final round. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, it is always executed (excluding the ball entered at the end timing of the interval period). In the case of execution, as described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the big winning opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the large winning opening count-up effect.
Based on the end of the interval period, the big winning opening count-up production was configured to be forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period, and the game ball was detected in the big winning opening 54 during the big hit end demo period. In the case (when a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541), it may be configured not to be executed.

≪Bonus winning production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the bonus prize-winning effect is allowed to be executed when the execution timing of the bonus-winning effect is reached within the round period and the interval period. On the other hand, during the jackpot end demo period, even if the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives, the bonus prize-winning effect is prohibited from being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, within this interval period. When the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect within this interval period is permitted. However, if the production time of the bonus prize-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the bonus prize-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, all the bonus prize-winning effects are executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if the bonus winning image and the bonus winning sound are provided as the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, as with the bonus winning effect, the large winning opening count-up effect may be executed with the bonus winning within the interval period as an opportunity. In that case, the interval period ends from the execution start timing of the large winning opening count-up effect. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big prize opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), even if a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, this interval period If the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the lapse of time, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect within this jackpot end demo period is prohibited. However, during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect is only prohibited, and the prize balls will be paid out based on this bonus prize-winning. Further, in the above case, the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as well as the bonus winning effect.

As a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period is set as the bonus prize-winning effect permissible period during which the bonus prize-winning effect is allowed to be executed, and the bonus prize-winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. You may. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the big hit end demo period as the bonus winning production allowable period. As an example, out of the 20 seconds of the big hit end demo period, only the first 5 seconds is set as the bonus winning production allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds is set as the bonus winning production prohibition period. Further, as a further modification example, the bonus winning effect permissible period and the bonus winning effect prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round. As an example, the first 1.5 of the interval period of 2 seconds may be set. Seconds may be set as the bonus winning production permissible period, and 0.5 seconds after that may be set as the bonus winning production prohibition period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the bonus winning production prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, considering that the timing when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 and the execution timing of the bonus winning effect are synchronized, after the final round game is completed. If a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period of, the bonus winning effect is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the end timing of the interval period). As described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the bonus winning effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning effect is set to the interval period based on the end of the interval period. While it is configured to be forcibly interrupted at the end timing of (However, if the bonus winning image and the bonus winning sound are provided as the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image is interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus is added. The winning sound may be output without interruption), and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demo period (game with the right general winning opening switch 641). (When a ball is detected) may be configured so that the bonus winning effect is not executed. In that case, the general winning opening count-up effect is also the right general winning within the interval period after the end of the final round game. When a game ball is detected by the mouth switch 641, it is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the end timing of the interval period), and when executing it, as described above, from the production time of the general winning opening count-up effect. However, if it is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the general winning opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period, the general winning opening count-up effect is forcibly performed at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. It is configured to be interrupted, and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the big hit end demonstration period (when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641), it is configured not to be executed. You may.

On the other hand, during the big hit start demo period, theoretically, the game ball does not enter the big prize opening 54 (because no over-winning occurs), so during the big hit start demo period, the big prize is won. No oral prize-winning effect (over-winning effect) is executed. It is possible to enter the general winning opening 64 even during the jackpot start demo period, but even if the ball is entered into the general winning opening 64, the general winning opening winning effect will be produced during the jackpot start demo period. No bonus prize-winning effect) is executed, and even if the ball is entered during the big hit start demo period, at any timing (especially even if the ball is entered at the end of the big hit start demo period), the entry is made. The general prize opening prize production (bonus prize production) corresponding to the ball will not be performed in the first round game after the big hit start demo, and the prize ball (number of prize balls) corresponding to the ball will not be performed. It is not a cumulative target in the cumulative prize ball number display.

(Launch handle detection)
The game by the gaming machine PM is executed on the premise that the player rotates the firing handle 12 to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area PA. The launch handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) that detects that the player is touching the launch handle 12. This touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance when the player touches the firing handle 12. When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the firing handle 12, it outputs a detection signal that permits the firing solenoid to be energized to the payout control board 300. Further, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits the effect control command (handle state effect command) to the effect control board 200. Thereby, the staging control board 200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 12 (whether or not the firing handle 12 is operated).

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over-winning effect and the general winning effect. Even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the staging control means 220 will win a big prize for the game ball launched before that. When a game ball exceeding the specified count number (11th game ball in the illustrated example) is detected by entering the mouth 54 (when an over-winning occurs), an over-winning effect is executed. It has become like. Similarly, in the staging control means 220, even if it is not detected that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the game ball launched before that is a general prize. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 by entering the mouth 64 (when a bonus winning is generated), the bonus winning effect is executed. That is, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the timing of the over winning and the timing of the bonus winning. Therefore, even if the player stops firing the game ball by closing the large winning opening 54 (the round game ends), an over-winning or bonus winning is generated within the interval period. In some cases, an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect will occur, and there will be dissatisfaction that no winning effect will be performed even though the game ball actually entered the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

(Game start preparation production)
In the present embodiment, when the currently executing gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-special gaming state), the waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is triggered by the interruption of the game continuing for a predetermined time or longer. Is executed. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that, for example, the period in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the period in which the variation display of the special symbol is not performed is a predetermined time. This means that the period during which the game ball does not enter or pass through a specific winning opening continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the period during which the game ball is not launched continues for a predetermined time or longer. The end condition of this standby demo effect is when the interrupted state of the game is released (when the game is started or restarted), and for example, the player touches the launch handle 12 (the launch handle 12 is operated). That) is detected by the touch sensor, or when there is a ball entering the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, which is a specific winning opening, and the game ball passes through the operating gate 53. And the entry into the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not apply (even if the game ball passes through the operating gate 53 or the general winning openings 61 to 64 are entered, the standby demonstration effect does not end). Also, during the standby demo effect, the volume becomes zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than the state where the standby demo effect is not performed (during the game). The volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demo effect does not end even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in the situation where the game is interrupted, it is not necessary to perform the production more than necessary, so the sound is muted or the volume is reduced, but even in that state, the standby demo production is maintained (the game is interrupted). (While showing that), the volume related to the production after the standby demo production is completed (the game is in progress, that is, the symbol is changing) can be adjusted after visualizing it even during the standby demo production.

FIG. 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. The staging control means 220 takes the opportunity of detecting the contact of the player by the touch sensor during the execution of the standby demo effect (triggered by receiving the handle state effect command from the main control board 100) to perform the standby demo. The execution of the effect is finished, and the execution of the game start preparation effect (launch detection effect) is started. The game start preparation effect is, for example, a production in which the characters "Welcome" are displayed on the screen or the voice "Welcome" is output from the speaker 11 to give the feeling that the game has started or resumed (a production that welcomes the game). ). This game start preparation effect is an effect performed immediately after the standby demo effect is completed, and is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), similarly to this standby demo effect.

In the present embodiment, in the game state (non-special game state) in which the game start preparation effect can be performed, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed, and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be performed. In the state (special game state), the game start preparation effect is not performed. That is, the game start preparation effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect are not performed in the same game state, and of course, they are not executed in duplicate at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is turned off and restored)
In the present embodiment, when a power cut occurs during the execution of the special game, a power return notification effect for notifying that the power is restored from the power cut is executed when the power is restored from the power cut. This power supply cutoff / recovery notification effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) and outputting a voice indicating that the power has been restored from the speaker 11 (power restoration notification voice). Is. The image indicating that the power has been restored is referred to as a power restoration notification image, the power supply disconnection restoration image, or the power supply disconnection restoration screen, and the voice indicating that the power has been restored from the speaker 11 is referred to as a power restoration notification voice or power supply. It is called a disconnection / return voice. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the power return effect (output time of the power return notification sound) is longer than "29 seconds", which is the maximum time of one round game (long open round game), "30". It is set to "seconds". For example, when the power is cut off in the middle of a predetermined round game and the power is turned off and restored from the middle of the predetermined round game (when restarted from the middle of the predetermined round game), at least during the remaining time of the round game. Since the power supply cutoff / recovery sound is output, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the round game is restarted. Here, when the power cutoff / recovery sound and the big hit medium effect sound compete with each other, the power supply cutoff / return sound is prioritized over the big hit medium effect sound (for example, the power supply cutoff / return sound is output at a louder voice level than the big hit medium effect sound. Or stop the output of the effect sound during the big hit). Further, when the power cutoff / recovery sound is output, even if an over-winning occurs in the round game after restarting, the power-off / recovery sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound (for example, the power-off / recovery sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound). The return sound may be output at a high audio level, or the output of the over-winning sound may be stopped). In addition, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is longer than the output time of the voice indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification voice) so that it can be recognized that the jackpot is being hit. It is desirable to configure it short. For example, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is 15 seconds, and the output time of the voice indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification voice) is 30. It is desirable to use seconds. In addition, in the situation where the image showing that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is displayed, the effect during the big hit is not displayed, so the cumulative prize ball number display and highlight display, the over prize image and the bonus prize image are displayed. It will not be displayed. In addition, when the power is turned off and restored, the effect information regarding the cumulative prize ball value held before the power is turned off is erased, so an image showing that the power is restored when the power is turned off and restored (power restoration). When the display of the notification image) is completed and the effect of the big hit is displayed, the cumulative prize ball number display will be restarted from zero (“0”), and the highlighting display condition (reaching a specific value) will also be displayed. Since it will be reset (as well as the conditions until the power is turned off), the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power is turned off reaches a specific value by entering the next large winning opening 54 (for example, 10,000). Even if the number is 9999 before the power is cut off, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed at zero during the big hit after the power is turned off and the power is turned off. Even if there is one ball, it will not be highlighted. In addition, when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) at the time of power interruption / recovery is completed and the effect of the big hit is displayed, the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image). While the image is displayed, if there is a ball in the large prize opening 54 or a ball in the general winning opening 64, the prize ball corresponding to the entry is paid out, but the image showing that the power is restored ( While the power return notification image) is displayed, the over-winning image is not displayed, the bonus winning image is displayed, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed, and the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is not performed. At that time, (1) the cumulative prize ball number display may be started from zero even when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is completed and the effect is restored during the big hit. Then, (2) when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is completed and the effect is restored during the big hit, the cumulative prize ball number display is an image indicating that the power has been restored (power supply). The cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed by adding the numerical values of the prize ball payouts corresponding to the entry into the large winning opening 54 and the entry into the general winning opening 64 while the return notification image) is being displayed. In addition, the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is being executed before the power is turned off, and the count-up effect has not been completed yet, and the prize ball corresponding to the count-up effect. If the power is cut off when the payout is being executed and has not been completed yet (for example, when the count-up effect for 300 prize balls and the payout are in progress), the power is turned on after the power is restored. The rest of the count-up effect that was performed before the interruption occurred will not be performed, but the prize balls that have not been paid out will be paid out. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch operation). In some cases, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), and the decorative symbol is returned in the state of being stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

(Right-handed notification image)
During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17 above, the right-handed display area 731 of the screen is used to urge the player to hit the right-hand side (to shoot the game ball aiming at the right-hand side area PA2). The hit notification image is displayed. Further, in the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen, an over-winning image is displayed when an over-winning occurs. The right-handed display area 731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Further, during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B of the screen, triggered by the occurrence of the bonus winning. The right-handed display area 731 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated during the execution of the special game, the over-winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the right-handed notification image, and one of the information does not hide the other information. There is.

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing a volume adjustment screen of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the left and right keys of the cross key are simultaneously operated by the player during the execution of the special game, the volume adjustment images showing the volume levels of a plurality of stages are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen. Will be done. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the display mode is adjusted to the third stage volume level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by operating the left key or the right key by the player, it is possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of the voice such as the BGM and the sound effect output from the speaker 11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is being displayed, operating the right key raises the volume level, and operating the left key lowers the volume level.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the special game is being executed, further, the over-winning effect is being executed (the situation where the over-winning sound is output), or the bonus winning effect is being executed (bonus). Regardless of whether the winning sound is output), the volume of the speaker 11 can be adjusted by the player operating the left and right keys. Therefore, the volume is adjusted by the player during the execution of the over-winning effect (the situation where the over-winning sound is output) or during the execution of the bonus winning effect (the situation where the bonus winning sound is output). In that case, the adjusted volume level will change in real time as the volume level of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound currently being output. That is, if the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is changed in the middle of the volume adjustment operation by the player, the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is different before and after the volume adjustment operation. It is possible to make it. The audio image display area 736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Similarly, the audio image display area 736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated during the execution of the special game, the over-winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and the other information is not hidden by one of the information. .. The highlight and volume adjustment screens are superimposed when executed at the same time, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and when superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlight. (Part or all of the highlighting is hidden in the volume control screen).

≪Conditions for excessive winning error in general winning openings≫
The "error occurrence condition" is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, and the effect is produced. An error notification effect is performed by the control board 200.

Hereinafter, as one of the plurality of error occurrence conditions, the excess winning error occurrence conditions of the general winning openings 61 to 64 will be described. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 64 are set to be different.

The condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the number of game balls entered into the general winning openings 61 to 63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning opening switch 611). Is a condition that is satisfied when the number reaches the first specified number. The first specified number is set to, for example, "30". That is, when 30 game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 in 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is satisfied.

The condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 is that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) is the second specified number. It is a condition that is satisfied when the value is reached. The second specified number is set to, for example, "60". That is, when 60 game balls enter the general winning opening 64 in 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 is satisfied.

As a modification of the present embodiment, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of the game state currently being executed. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the game is the main subject, the general winning openings 61 to 63 have a relative ball entry frequency per unit time than the general winning openings 64. Therefore, the threshold value for satisfying the condition is set to be higher in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 than in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 under predetermined conditions (predetermined winning frequency), the excessive winning error condition is not satisfied, but the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. If a prize is won under a predetermined condition (predetermined frequency of winning balls), an excessive winning error will occur. On the other hand, in the game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main, the general winning opening 64 has a higher ball entry frequency per unit time than the general winning openings 61 to 63. Is supposed to be relatively high, so it is set so that the threshold value for satisfying the condition is higher in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 than in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63. ing. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 under specific conditions (specific winning frequency), the excessive winning error does not hold, but the game ball is specified as the general winning opening 61 to 64. If the ball is entered under the conditions (specific frequency of entry), an excessive winning error will occur.

Even if the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is canceled. It is preferable to set the condition and the condition for canceling the excessive winning error of the right general winning opening 64 to the same condition. The error cancellation condition is, for example, a condition for ending the error notification effect (for example, 30 seconds have passed from the display of the error notification screen / the start of the error notification sound), and the on-output of the outer end signal related to the excessive winning error. The condition for stopping (the condition for turning off the output, for example, 300 seconds have passed from the start of the output), the power is turned off once, and then the power is restored.

≪Duplicate execution of over-winning production and bonus winning production≫
FIG. 31 is a time chart used to explain the overlapping execution of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus-winning occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect can be executed in duplicate. Overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over-winning effect and the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus winning effect overlap, and the execution period of both effects. There are cases where all of the above overlap and cases where part of the execution period of both effects overlap. The illustrated example shows a case where the execution period of the over-winning effect and the execution period of the bonus winning effect partially overlap. When the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A in which the over-winning image is displayed and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B in which the bonus winning image is displayed. Is provided as a display area that is separate and independent of each other, so that the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not superimposed and displayed before and after. On the other hand, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound may be output in duplicate, or only one of them may be output. If only one is output, the first prize may be prioritized (that is, the first prize is the prize for the large prize opening 54, and the second prize is the prize for the general prize opening 64). In that case, priority is given to the over winning sound, and if the first winning is the winning to the general winning opening 64 and the later winning is the winning to the large winning opening 54, the bonus winning sound is given priority), later. If the winning is prioritized (that is, if the first winning is the winning of the large winning opening 54 and the later winning is the winning of the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning sound is given priority and the first winning is given. Is a prize in the general prize opening 64, and if the later prize is a prize in the large prize opening 54, priority is given to the over prize sound). When giving priority to the first prize, for example, if there is a later prize during the output of the first prize sound, the second prize sound is output after the first prize sound is output. The output may be started, or the winning sound related to the later winning may not be output at all. When giving priority to the later winning, for example, if there is a later winning during the output of the winning sound related to the earlier winning, the winning sound related to the earlier winning is interrupted with the later winning as an opportunity, and then later. The winning sound related to the winning may be started to be output.

As a modification of this embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus-winning occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning image and the bonus-winning image may not be displayed in duplicate. That is, when the over-winning and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, even if the display period (or display timing) of the over-winning image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus winning image do not overlap. good. In that case, the case where the entire display period of both images does not overlap and the case where a part of the display periods of both images do not overlap are included.

If the over-winning image and the bonus-winning image are not displayed in duplicate, the one who won the prize first in the bonus-winning image and the over-winning image (the one whose game ball was detected first). The winning image may be configured to be displayed preferentially. Also, as the opposite configuration, if the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in duplicate, the one who won the prize later in time among the bonus winning image and the over-winning image (later the game ball is won). The winning image of the detected person) may be preferentially displayed.

(Multiple over prizes)
FIG. 32 is a time chart when over-winning and bonus winning occur a plurality of times within a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, when multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), the over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (winning of the 11th game ball). However, the over-winning effect is not performed for the second and subsequent over-winning (winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls). That is, if multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period, only the execution of the first over-winning effect is allowed, and the execution of the second and subsequent over-winning effects is restricted (regulated). ). However, the prize ball will be paid out twice due to the over-winning, and the large winning opening count-up effect due to the over-winning will be performed twice (the first large winning opening count-up effect will be performed twice without interruption). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus prize-winning effect is performed for each of the bonus prizes each time, and the prize is awarded by the bonus prize. The ball payout is also performed twice, and the general winning opening count-up effect by the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general winning opening count-up effect is performed twice without interruption). That is, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period, it is permitted to execute all the bonus prizes a plurality of times. As a modification, if multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period, the over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (the winning of the 11th game ball), and the second and subsequent over-winnings are performed. It is configured so that the over-winning effect is also performed for the over-winning (the winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls), but if there is a second over-winning during the execution of the first over-winning effect, ( 1) After the first over-winning effect is completed (after it is completed), the execution of the second over-winning effect is started, or (2) even if the first over-winning effect is in the middle. It may be configured to be interrupted with the second over-winning as an opportunity, and then to start the execution of the second over-winning effect. In that case, in either case (1) or (2), the prize ball is paid out twice due to the over-winning, and the large winning opening count-up effect due to the over winning is also performed twice (the first large winning opening count). It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption). Furthermore, if multiple bonus prizes occur within a predetermined period, the bonus prize-winning effect will be performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize-winning effect will be performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, if there is a second or subsequent bonus prize during the execution of the first bonus prize production, (3) after the first bonus prize production is completed (after it is completed), the second time Start the execution of the bonus winning effect of, or (4) interrupt the execution of the second bonus winning effect even if the first bonus winning effect is in the middle, and then start the execution of the second bonus winning effect. It may be configured as follows. In that case, in any of (3) and (4), the prize ball is paid out twice by the bonus prize, and the general prize opening count-up effect by the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general prize opening count). It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption).

≪External information signal≫
In the present embodiment, the external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal plate 600 to an external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a prize ball signal, a big hit signal, a continuous villa signal, and a symbol confirmation signal. , Door frame opening signal, security signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included.

Here, the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display can be a useful judgment material for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall inside the gaming store, and makes each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without going through a data display.

(Prize ball signal)
The prize ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number of game balls (“10” in the present embodiment) are paid out from the game machine. That is, in the present embodiment, every time 10 prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). In the present embodiment, a prize ball number counter for counting the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided, and one game ball is provided by the payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit 34. Each time it is detected, "1" is added to the prize ball number counter. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal board 600. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (that is, it is counted from the initial value "0").

FIG. 33 is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general prize opening 64. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on the fact that one game ball enters the general prize opening 64 is "3". Therefore, when the entry of a game ball is detected by the right general prize opening switch 641, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. To. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), The value of the prize ball number counter after addition does not reach a predetermined number, and the prize ball signal is not output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), after addition. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches a predetermined number once, the prize ball signal is output once. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prize ball signal is output even once when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (the trigger is that the general winning opening normal winning effect is executed once). There are cases where the prize ball signal is not output and cases where the prize ball signal is output once. In the above description, of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the general winning opening 64 has been described as an example, but the same can be said for the general winning openings 61 to 63.

FIG. 34 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on the fact that one game ball enters the large winning opening 54 is "15". Therefore, when the entry of the game ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. .. At this time, if the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is predetermined. By reaching the number once, the prize ball signal will be output once. On the other hand, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (corresponding to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is a predetermined number. By reaching twice, the prize ball signal will be output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prize is given when one game ball enters the large winning opening 54 (when the large winning opening normal winning effect or the large winning opening over winning effect is executed once). The ball signal may be output once, or the prize ball signal may be output twice.

<Relationship with other big hit productions>
Next, the relationship between the winning-related production (large winning opening winning production, general winning opening winning production) and other big hit medium winning productions will be described. In the following, as other jackpot productions, (C) hold-ream suggestion production, (D) promotion production, and (E) special production will be illustrated.

≪C. Hold ream suggestion production ≫
The hold consecutive suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the hold inner consecutive villa is established (there is a big hit hold) during the execution of the special game. As described above, the "reserved inner villa" is a special case related to the operation-reserved ball when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding operation-reserved ball is a big hit. It is planned that a big hit will be made in one or more subsequent operation holding balls existing at a predetermined timing between the time when the hit / fail judgment of the symbol is permitted and the end of the special game executed by the big hit. It means that the operation hold ball (also called "big hit hold") is included. In this embodiment, the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game. In the case of a state (high base state), that is, when the consecutive villa is ongoing, if there is a big hit hold in the hold, the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed in the special game currently being executed. To put it the other way around, if the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the normal game state (low base state), even if the big hit hold exists in the hold, the current state is present. The pending consecutive suggestion effect is not executed in the special game being executed. Further, it is preferable that the special game currently being executed is based on the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol, and it is also preferable that the jackpot hold in the hold is also the hold related to the second special symbol. ..

In the present embodiment, the execution timing of the hold continuous suggestion effect is set to the jackpot end demo period as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14. Whether or not the hold continuous suggestion effect can be executed is determined at the start of the special game execution, and is determined by lottery when the hold continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied at the start of the special game execution. As a modification, even if the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed when the winner is won in the execution lottery held when the hold continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied immediately before or at the start of the big hit end demo. good.

The execution condition of the pending continuous suggestion effect is based on the assumption that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and the operation of one or more special symbols is suspended. This is a condition that is satisfied when a jackpot hold that is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) is included. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the operation hold ball of the special symbol, if the big hit type related to the big hit hold is not a high profit big hit (4R specific big hit or 4R normal big hit), it is held. The continuous suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are multiple jackpot holds in the operation hold ball of the special symbol, the jackpot type related to the first jackpot hold is a low profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the later jackpot hold is a high profit jackpot. Does not execute the hold consecutive suggestion effect in the special game currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special game, a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is generated by the variable display within a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it definite that it will occur, but it is also definite that the next special game after the special game in which the hold-ream suggestion effect is executed is not a low-profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). In this embodiment, the "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted, in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. The target operation holding ball is limited to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol.

The hold-ream suggestion effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot end demo period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. As this special image, an effect image composed of a still image, an effect image composed of a moving image, and an effect image composed of both a still image and a moving image can be exemplified.

In the present embodiment, the hold continuous suggestion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). That is, the hold-ream suggestion effect can be executed only in the super-juvenile big hit effect as a big hit medium effect pattern. On the other hand, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed in any of the super-jumping jackpot effect, the Kotobuki jackpot A effect, the Kotobuki jackpot B effect, the Kidai hit A effect, and the Kidai hit B effect as the big hit medium effect pattern.

In the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the pending continuous suggestion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the hold continuous suggestion effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect. That is, the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, while the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Because. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the hold consecutive suggestion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed in duplicate, and the hold consecutive suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in duplicate. The production and the over-winning production or the bonus winning production are executed independently. As a modification, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed during the round game, and in that case, the hold continuous suggestion effect and the over winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed. The bonus winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the hold consecutive suggestion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over winning image and the bonus winning image is displayed on the back, or is not. (Display), and if a special sound effect is generated during the hold continuous suggestion effect, this special sound effect is given priority and output (the volume of the over prize sound or bonus prize sound is reduced, or It may be configured not to output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the hold continuous suggestion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Since the reserved inner consecutive villa is a reward with a higher degree of profit for the player than the over prize and the bonus prize, the execution time of the reserved inner consecutive villa production is set relatively long, and the player misses it. I try not to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the holding inner villa production is executed only as a "truth production" that deterministically informs the establishment of the holding inner villa, but as a modification thereof, the holding inner villa is actually used. You may include the "Gase production" that has not been established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions of the hold inner consecutive villa production, it is a condition that the preceding operation hold ball is a big hit hold of a high profit big hit (16R big hit), but it is limited to this. Instead, the preceding operation hold ball may be a big hit hold other than a high profit big hit (16R big hit), that is, a big hit hold corresponding to a low profit big hit (4R big hit).

Further, by changing the display mode of the cumulative prize ball number display from the normal display mode (for example, white display) to the special display mode (golden display), it may be suggested that the reserved inner villa is established. Further, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of the highlighting effect (highlighting) performed when the value of the cumulative prize balls reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that the reserved inner villa is established by the display mode of the emphasis staging.

<< D. Promotion production ≫
The promotion effect suggests or notifies the profit mode (referred to as "provisional profit mode" for convenience) related to the jackpot before or at the start of the special game when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the special symbol. Later, it is an effect that suggests whether or not the actual profit mode related to the jackpot has a higher profit degree than the provisional profit mode during the execution of the special game. In other words, it is suggested whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and the jackpot is suggested through the series of processes. It is a production that shows whether or not the profit mode of is promoted (changed).

The types of promotion effects are roughly divided into round promotion effects and probabilistic promotion effects. In the round promotion effect, when the specified number of special games (provisional specified number of rounds) suggested or notified when a big hit occurs is uncertain whether it is the true number of rounds or the false number of rounds, after the provisional number of rounds Is also a production that suggests the possibility that the round game will continue. Some of the round promotion effects suggest that the round has been promoted, and some suggest that the round is promoted as well as the true specified number of rounds or the number of long open rounds. The probabilistic promotion effect is a state in which it is uncertain whether the jackpot type (provisional jackpot type) suggested or notified when a jackpot occurs is a true jackpot type or a false jackpot type (whether it is a specific jackpot or not). ), It is a production that suggests the possibility of shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is definite that the promotion is successful when the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probabilistic promotion effect) occurs during the execution of the special game.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 16, the probabilistic promotion effect is performed when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in the normal gaming state, or in the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, the second special symbol ". This is executed when "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the effect pattern during the jackpot when "4R specific jackpot" is won. The execution timing of this probabilistic promotion effect is set during the jackpot end demo period. In this probabilistic promotion effect, the movable accessory 24 is dropped and moved so that it overlaps with the screen, and then the movable accessory 24 is moved upward again to display the title "Shoudai Hit" on the exposed screen. By doing so, it is a production content that makes it look as if it has been promoted from "Ki jackpot production" to "Shou jackpot production" (the jackpot type is promoted from 4R normal jackpot to 4R specific jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 14, when the second special symbol "16 specific jackpot" is won in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the round promotion effect is the "jutsu jackpot B effect" as the big hit medium effect pattern. Is selected. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. In this round promotion effect, the characters "final round" (fake display) are once displayed on the screen to make it appear as if the currently running round game is the final round game, and then this model. By displaying the cut-in image of the message "That's not the case!" Issued by the main characters of (The jackpot type is promoted from 4R specific jackpot to 16R specific jackpot).

In the present embodiment, the round promotion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is "16R special game (high profit special game)", but the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are currently being executed. Is configured so that the special game can be executed by either "16R special game (high profit special game)" or "4R special game (low profit special game)".

Further, in the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the probabilistic promotion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the probabilistic promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, while the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the probabilistic promotion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed in duplicate, and the probabilistic promotion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in duplicate, and the probabilistic promotion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed. The winning effect or the bonus winning effect is to be executed independently. As a modification, the probabilistic promotion effect may be configured to be executed during the round game, in which case the probabilistic promotion effect and the over-winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and the probabilistic promotion effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed. And may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the probabilistic promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over-winning image and the bonus winning image is displayed or hidden on the back). Also, if a special sound effect is generated during the probabilistic promotion effect, this special sound effect is given priority and output (the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is reduced or not output). It's okay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be duplicated during the execution of the round promotion effect. That is, since the round promotion effect is executed from the 4th round to the interval period of the 4th round, if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs within the interval period, the execution period of the round promotion effect ( The execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over prize image and the bonus prize image is displayed or hidden on the back), and a special sound effect is generated during the round promotion effect. In this case, the dedicated sound effect may be preferentially output (the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be reduced or not output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the probabilistic promotion effect is set to the start of the jackpot end demo. It is set to "20 seconds" from the time to the end. On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is set to "0.5 seconds" respectively. Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Further, the execution time of the probabilistic promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

≪E. Special production ≫
The special production is a highly rare production that is executed when a predetermined consecutive villa condition is satisfied. The "predetermined consecutive villa condition" means that the number of consecutive villas for a big hit reaches a specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment), and at least the specified number of times (20th time in this embodiment) is the highest type of big hit. It is a condition that is satisfied when it becomes a profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot). This special effect appears during the execution of the special game (16R special game) that is performed when the specified number of big hits (20th) occurs. However, this special production ends in the final round (16th round) round game, and the end demo period after that is not included (however, even if the final round interval period is included, the final round interval period is included. It may not be included). Further, this special effect is composed of an effect content (special movie) in which the highly rare premier characters of this model are displayed one by one in order.

As a predetermined consecutive villa condition, in addition to the specified number of consecutive villas, for example, the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the consecutive villa state reaches the predetermined number of times (the 16R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is the specified number of times). It may be added as a condition that the total number of rounds won in the consecutive villa state and the cumulative number of prize balls reach a predetermined number. Here, as described above, the term "renso (renso state)" means, as described above, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state as the gaming state during the non-special gaming state. It refers to a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state (a state in which a big hit in the specific game state occurs continuously after the first hit). The "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than that of a normal game state. It is a gaming state in which any one of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific gaming state means at least a gaming state in which the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game.

In the present embodiment, the special effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game).

In the present embodiment, even if an over-winning or bonus winning effect occurs during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect. The reason is that when the special production and the over-winning production or the bonus winning production compete with each other, it is better to give priority to the execution of the highly rare special production (display of the premier character that can be seen only in the special production). This is because the result is satisfactory for the player.

As a modification of the present embodiment, if an over-winning or bonus winning effect occurs during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may be duplicated. When the special effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the display priority of the special effect (layer priority) is higher than the display priority of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect (layer priority). It is preferable that the priority) is set higher. However, while the special effect is an effect that is displayed large on the entire screen, the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are effects that are displayed smaller toward the edge of the screen, so the display priority of the special effect. The display priority (layer priority) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may be set higher than the (layer priority).

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the special effect is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the big hit start demo to the end of the final round (16th round) round game. On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is set to "0.5 seconds" respectively. Therefore, the execution time of the special effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

If the power is cut off during the execution of the special game (for example, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power failure or the like), if an over prize or a bonus prize is generated after the power is cut off. After the power is turned off, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is executed. This can be executed because the decision to execute the over-winning effect and the decision to execute the bonus-winning effect are triggered by the over-winning and the bonus-winning, that is, the event after the power is turned off and restored. On the other hand, the staging control command for power-off / recovery transmitted from the main control board 100 after the power-off is restored does not include data for restoration of the hold sequence suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect, and also. Since the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200 is not backed up by the power supply, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the special game, even if the execution condition of each effect is satisfied or the execution opportunity comes at the time of the power failure, it is special. With regard to the hold continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect that determine whether or not the game can be executed at the start of the game, after the power is turned off, there is no data on whether or not the effect can be executed. Is not executed in. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch operation). In some cases, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), and the decorative symbol is returned in the state of being stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 48. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<< Main processing on the main control side >>
35 to 36 are flowcharts showing the main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program is started and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as the initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and the access permission of the RAM 103 is granted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table in which the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power off normal information is stored (S6).

Here, when the information on the normal power failure is stored (S6: YES), the checksum is calculated for the predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it is backed up normally, the checksum at power-on will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of turning on the power whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, when the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of turning on the power is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

Next, in the power-off / recovery setting process, the power-on normal information is set, various errors are initially set, and the communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 is sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the information of the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and the power off / return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power supply off / return command”) at the time of power failure / recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is performed (S15). This power-off / recovery command includes information on the communication line inspection, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy ball entry states, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. The untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of operation-holding balls is requested (. S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is in the open state) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 54 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (a flag indicating that the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, the clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power cut, the value of the power cut confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power cut has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, in this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition processing (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to utilize the remaining time from S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. Then, when an interrupt request is made in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, when the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, when the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 and the power-off processing described below is executed.

Next, as the power cutoff processing (S26 to S32), first, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is the power-on normal data (S27). In the case of power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, when the power-on normal information is not (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

Next, clear word 2 ("AAH") to restart the watchdog timer.
Is set (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by writing the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 in order to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset time-out time. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before the time-out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input process is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, and the magnetic sensor. , Radio sensor, etc. are read, their status is determined, and then these detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this various random number update process, a normal symbol variation pattern random number, a special symbol variation pattern random number, and a special symbol variation addition pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, a random number per normal symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. When the value of the counter makes one round, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, the timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by the interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, confirmed display time) related to the variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72. A specified fluctuation time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. If the small hit game of the other special symbol is executed during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the small hit games is being executed. The timekeeping of the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and as the determination result, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set.

Next, the winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the large winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switch 611, 641 in the input process (S53) is used. Based on this, when the switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed and it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition to temporarily storing the game ball, a transmission request for an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is performed. The details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 in order to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type, and the payout control board 400 is used, based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize ball monitoring process. The data received from is monitored and the communication with the payout control board 400 is inspected.

Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation hold ball information. , The number of pending balls is updated up to a maximum of 4, and random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery are stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 is performed, the normal symbol changing process and the normal symbol stop symbol display process are performed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. , Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessory, processing during demonstration during operation of ordinary electric accessory, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol change processing, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner or to confirm it.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, when the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, one normal symbol operation pending ball number is digested and the normal symbol is activated. The hit / fail judgment, the symbol judgment, the fluctuation pattern judgment, the fluctuation time setting, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 is monitored, and if the game ball is won, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is related. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbol storage, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the special symbol change start process (S420) and the special symbol change process (S430), which will be described in detail later, are performed according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), Processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, the special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and end of the special electric accessory 542 are set as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 542, and the operation is large. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, and the like are executed in order.

Next, the large winning opening validity period setting process is executed (S67). In this large winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the large winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the large winning opening 54 is set as the determination result.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol exists, one reserved ball is digested, a command request for the number of symbol storage numbers, and a hit / fail judgment of the special symbol are made. , Design determination of special symbol, determination of probability fluctuation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric accessory, setting of demo production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball entry passage time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball entry passage time abnormality is set and the effect control command including the error information (“error”). In addition to requesting the effect specification command "), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to the external terminal.

Next, the game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated (the number of specified rounds), the number of balls on hold for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. Further, display data for displaying the error state information detected by the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, the LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65), in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, display an error, and the like. Display data created by abnormality detection processing (S69), game status display processing (S71), etc. can be used for each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol hold lamp 73, 74, and normal figure hold. The data is output to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, the firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 and the game ball is allowed to be launched. do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) were acquired in order to operate each electric accessory 542. Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, the effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the staging control board 200.

Next, the external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, the game information related to the game machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. Examples of the external information signal include a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, a big hit signal, and a continuous villa signal. There is a symbol confirmation signal and so on.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during the main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-masqueradable interrupt is generated and the power outage confirmation flag is turned on. do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power-off processing (S)
26 to S32) will be executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time as storing, a first start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 521 is input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time as storing, a second start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Next, the operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the actuated gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the actuated gate switch 531 is input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate winning is won. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the large winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the big winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541 is input, the large winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , A large winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the left general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input.
When the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input, the left general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is used as the winning data of the main information storage means 180. Along with temporarily storing in the storage area, a left general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611, the winning monitoring process this time is terminated.

Subsequently, the right general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the right general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input. When the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input, the right general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641, the winning monitoring process this time is terminated.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. Applies to.

(Starting port monitoring control processing)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning of the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the lottery random value related to the first special symbol game is a random value per special symbol, a random value per special symbol, or a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is added by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 51 is completed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205). When the winning of the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). When the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than four (S206: YES), the lottery random value related to the second special symbol game is a random value per special symbol, a random value per special symbol, or a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is added by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is completed.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). When the number of operation-reserved balls is updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area of 180 (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (S211). In the case of the pre-judgment timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading judgment information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the start opening, a special symbol hit disorder is generated from the hit random number buffer (reserved n storage area or register, etc.). A numerical value is read out and a pre-determination of success or failure is performed (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (hit / fail pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the hit symbol random number buffer, and the symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern advance determination command including the information of the advance determination result (variation pattern advance determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol change start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol change start monitoring process described later is performed on the special symbol side of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that satisfies the change start condition. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, the processing on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

First, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for change)". It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special It is considered that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). , The process shifts to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to be digested. The details of this special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). .. Here, when the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the change start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (hereinafter). After setting (addresses of various tables used in the process and addresses of the RAM storage area) (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

If both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change start conditions are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. ..

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the change start of this time is started with reference to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, the processing method on the first special symbol side is the same except for special cases. It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is a process or a process on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of pending balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the start of this fluctuation, is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of the current fluctuation start is accessed, and the random value per special symbol and the special symbol per special symbol stored in the earliest reserved storage area (hold 1 storage area). The symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out in order, and these random values are used for the special symbol hit / fail determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423) described later. It is transferred to the special symbol hit / miss determination area, the special symbol symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the reserved storage area, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area to the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reserved storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol winning / failing determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol winning / failing determination process (S320), first, the special symbol winning / failing lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability change state, the high-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the low-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired. Next, a random number value per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, the values corresponding to the hit / fail determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, loss data “00H”) are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, the symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol and the character effect number (variable additional symbol information) of the special symbol are determined according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) and the character effect number of the special symbol determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability change on of the special symbol / probability change off of the special symbol / probability change on of the normal symbol). / Determined based on the combination with (4 patterns of probability variation off of ordinary symbols). If the result of the hit / fail determination is wrong, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the hit / miss determination of the special symbol is incorrect (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

When the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit (S342: YES), after the big hit game is completed, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The number of probability fluctuations is determined as the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (S345). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of times the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the big hit game is the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened. Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of electric support is determined as the number of times the electric chew support function is activated after the big hit game is completed (). S347). This determination result (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number, electric support number) is stored in the time reduction number storage area and the electric support number storage area of the main information storage means 180. Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current gaming state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game or after the small hit game is set (S349). Subsequently, the demo production time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (S350). Next, the special symbol hit / miss determination area and the special symbol symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / miss determination process (S320) and symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (standby)" to "01H (start of change)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402).

When the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is used to execute the processing related to the second special symbol. (Addresses of various tables and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The address of various tables used and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is used, and the special subject to this change is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in special cases? , The second special symbol processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the side. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) for shifting to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status (“01H”, “02H”, “03H”) is executed. do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is not 0 (S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start process (S420). The details of this special symbol change start processing (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (during fluctuation)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). The details of this special symbol change processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

(Special symbol change start processing)
Next, the special symbol change start processing (S420) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start processing (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a communication inspection command, a variation addition symbol information specification command, a variation pattern specification command, and a symbol specification command are generated in order, and these are used as the main information storage means. Stored in the command storage area of 180.

Subsequently, the content of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern is cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the processing during special symbol change (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change processing (S430).

First, in order to display the variation of the special symbol, the display pattern number switching process of the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner or a definite display.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (time-out)", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has expired (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol ends (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be definitely displayed is set on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 (S433). Subsequently, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the fixed display time in the special symbol game timer (S435). The "fixed display time" is a time for deterministically stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is stopped fluctuating. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (time-out)", that is, whether or not the final display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has expired (S441). Here, when the final display time of the special symbol ends (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stop symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data “55H” (S443). When the hit / fail determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) in order. Specifically, "00H (off)" is set in the probability variation flag, and "00H" is set in the probability fluctuation count counter, the fluctuation time shortening count counter, and the ball entry easy state count counter to clear zero.

Next, as the start demo setting process of the special game, the start demo display time is set and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, in order to clear the contents of the hit / fail determination flag, "00H" is set (S450).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination data is not the jackpot data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451). When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S452). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation number counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (S455).
When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S456). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number counter is zero (step S457). When the variation time reduction count counter is zero (S457: YES), it is assumed that the number of terminations of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S458). If the fluctuation time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is operating (S459). When the electric chew support function is operating (S459: YES), the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support count counter is zero (step S461). When the electric support count counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of times of the end of the easy entry state has been reached. If the number of times of electric support after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the number of times of the variation pattern selection state of the main information storage means 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset number of ends, and the number of ends is determined. If it has been reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the number of ends has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and fluctuation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451 to S464 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in (S465). The effect control board 200 side sets and updates the effect mode based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 47 to 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started in each round game.

When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored as a command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area (S504). The effect control board 200 side executes a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processes S506 to S510 are executed as the processes during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 is also determined. It is determined whether or not (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball wins only the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), it is special. The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (S509). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by 1 (S510).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511 and the end demo display time is set as the hit end demo setting process for the special game. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction count information set in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction counter (S512). Further, the electric support count information set in S347 is stored in the electric support count counter (S513).

Subsequently, with reference to the content of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is the operation by the specific symbol (so-called probabilistic symbol) (S514). When the condition device is operated by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation number (operation data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is stored. The operation of the probability fluctuation function of (S515) is started. On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operating data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter, and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction count information stored in the time reduction counter is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S516). In the case of the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is the electric chew support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). In the case of the electric chew support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S519), the start of the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S520), and the start of the operation of the open extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S521) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chew support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and this is used by the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S523). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S524).

<Processing on the staging control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the staging control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 49 to 55. The processing on the effect control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. The lamp is activated when the processing, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command activated by the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the arrival of the predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variation effect pattern. It is configured to include effect interrupt processing and transmission interrupt processing of image control commands that are activated at regular intervals.

In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset: Top priority", "Reset start processing due to various abnormalities: Top priority" → "Reception interrupt processing of production control command: Level 7" → "WDT (when runaway is detected) The priority levels are ranked in the order of "reset start processing: level 3" → "image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2" → "effect control side timer interrupt processing: level 1". The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, or when the sub-main CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are exemplified, but other interrupt processing actually exists.

In the main process on the effect control side, basically, the process is performed after setting either the state of prohibiting all interrupts or the state of prohibiting interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the main process on the effect control side is in the interrupt enable state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, in principle, the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. The interrupt request is permitted, but the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or the interrupt processing has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process is processed in a state in which other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are disabled. Then, each interrupt process returns to the effect control side main process with all interrupts enabled. The priority order (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the staging control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the staging control board 200 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a reset start process of the staging control board 200. In this reset start process, it is started by any of the reset when the power is turned on, the reset caused by various abnormalities, and the reset caused by WDT (when runaway is detected), and after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the staging control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the variable without the initial value is initialized by clearing 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 to the RAM 203.

Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in common for each model in advance, a process of setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Further, a request to turn off the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) is made to turn off all the lamps (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, the effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). The details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When shifting to the main process on the effect control side in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that a bug in the program occurs, the process returns to this process. To transition to a small power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

<< Main processing on the staging control side >>
Next, the staging control side main process (S609) of the staging control board 200 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, an address (starting address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is accurately expanded in the RAM 203 is acquired in the main process on the effect control side (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (starting of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of reset), and the operation of the movable accessory 24 is controlled by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the required location information. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is set by writing a predetermined clear word to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within the preset time-out time. It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Subsequently, the input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the read of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S912 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored for each interrupt occurrence, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). When all the input port states are "1", the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", when all are "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and in other cases, the signal level is set. Do not change (this confirms the input signal).

Subsequently, the error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effect by various devices is started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button notice effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within the predetermined operation effective time, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored. To hold.

Subsequently, the advance notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a advance notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern is generated according to the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). It will be decided by lottery. The advance notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the advance notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for designating the advance notice effect pattern number on the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, when the character advance notice effect pattern is selected as the advance notice effect pattern, a character request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). .. In this example, all of the plurality of types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) generated within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn by lottery in one main loop process, but the efficiency of the main loop processing is improved. In order to make the notice effect occur, the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes by dividing it into each time when the advance notice effect occurs (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, the advance notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the change of the decorative pattern needs to be synchronized with the start of the change of the decorative pattern (the image control command is sent immediately), so a lottery is performed in the starting main loop process. It is supposed to do.

Next, the device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 are stored. ), The pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, character advance notice effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, the one-frame time corresponds to the time required for the one-frame drawing process when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the staging display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, the drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when all the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

Subsequently, the command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. The effect control process corresponding to the type of is executed. The details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Then, it is determined whether or not the command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) is executed during the loop processing this time (S621). Immediately after command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and the process proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when command analysis is not executed (S)
621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number update process is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In the present embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the time of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead advance notice lottery random number, a decorative symbol random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a pre-determination command. When this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this hold information management process (S634), the symbol storage number command or the advance determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, the look-ahead determination is executed based on the information of the advance determination result, and the hold image of the effect display device 70 is executed. A process for updating the number of reserved images displayed on the display unit 710 and the display mode (display color, etc.) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol fluctuation-related commands include a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation-related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation-related command stops variation. If it is a command, the process for ending the variation effect of the decorative pattern is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demo effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demo effect command. When the jackpot effect-related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demo effect, a round effect, and an end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related command includes a small hit start demo effect command and a small hit end demo effect command. When the command related to the small hit effect is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In this small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demo effect and a small hit end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning opening winning-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the commands related to the winning opening are the first starting opening winning command, the second starting opening winning command, the operation gate winning command, the large winning opening winning command, the left general winning opening winning command, and the right general winning opening winning command. And so on. When this winning opening winning-related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning effect content determination process (S642). The details of the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S643). When this error effect specification command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (S644). In this error effect content determination process (S644), the error effect designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and the error state is notified by the image display of the liquid crystal display device 70, the lighting of the effect lamp LP, the sound of the speaker 11, and the like. Determine the error effect pattern for.

When the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO). Ends the command analysis process without doing anything.

(Prize production content determination process)
Next, the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning effect content determination process (S642).

First, the first start opening winning effect control process is executed (S701). In this first start opening winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the first starting opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the first start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 51 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the second start opening winning effect control process is executed (S702). In this second start opening winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the second starting opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the second start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 52 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the operation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this operation gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not the operation gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the operation gate winning command is stored, it is determined. On condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the operation gate winning effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53 is executed.

Subsequently, the large winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S704). In this large prize opening winning effect control process (S704), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the large winning opening winning command is stored. Then, on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the large prize opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is executed.

Subsequently, the left general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S705). In this left general winning opening winning effect control process (S705), it is determined whether or not the left general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the left general winning opening winning command is executed. If it is stored, the left general winning opening winning effect is executed to notify that the game ball has entered any of the general winning openings 61 to 63, provided that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied. ..

Subsequently, the right general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S706). In this right general winning opening winning effect control process (S706), it is determined whether or not the right general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the right general winning opening winning command is executed. If it is stored, the right general winning opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

<< Reception interrupt processing of staging control command >>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the staging control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing of the staging control command. As described above, the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command is started when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become like. The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will be referred to as a “first command”, and the EVENT data will be referred to as a “second command”.

First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the staging control command is fixed (S901). Specifically, the input value is fixed when the command data is read up to 5 times and the same value is read twice in succession. This is because the reading of the staging control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not fixed until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). When the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). It should be noted that the time when the effect lottery random number is acquired is the time when the effect control command is received, that is, the effect control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol changes. Therefore, by taking this as an opportunity, it is necessary to prevent periodicity in the acquisition time. By making the acquisition time of the staging lottery random numbers irregular in this way, inconveniences such as the same staging being unnaturally and repeatedly selected in various staging lottery are less likely to occur.

On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Timer interrupt processing on the staging control side >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the staging control side will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, the port input / output process is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, the device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, the drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for the effect operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the time such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, the button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation effective time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is effective.

Subsequently, the task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the value of the task counter (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (lamp data update processing of S917) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process of S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process of S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values ("0" to "15") is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and one other value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Subsequently, the lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data of the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs each bit to the lamp connection board 91 in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, so that all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is used. It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the above is out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, the error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after making all interrupts permitted and restoring the contents of the saved register, the timer interrupt process on the staging control side is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Transmission interrupt processing of image control commands >>
Next, the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command. The transmission interrupt process of this image control command occurs at predetermined fixed intervals (500 μs).

In the transmission interrupt process of this image control command, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

The main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the present embodiment, the over-winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in excess of the specified count number during the execution of the special game, so that the over-winning is achieved. By clearly notifying the player of what has occurred, it is possible to increase the satisfaction and uplifting feeling of the player for having enjoyed a special benefit that would not otherwise be possible, and as a result, the interest of the game. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the big winning opening winning effect (over winning effect) is performed when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game, and the game ball is the general winning opening 64. By performing a general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production) with the opportunity to enter the ball, a reduction is added between the large winning opening winning production and the general winning opening winning production performed during the execution of the special game. As a result, the monotonousness of the big hit middle staging can be eliminated, and as a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the large winning opening 54 is provided by performing the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect) when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. It is possible to prevent the player from being the only concern of the player by aiming and advancing the game, and to allow the player to enjoy the fun of aiming at the general winning opening 64, and the player actively plays the game. It can be expected to increase the chances of the ball entering the general winning opening 64, which will enhance the gambling spirit of the player and make the game even more entertaining, and as a result, the interest of the game. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the big winning opening count-up effect in relation to the big hit end demo period and the interval period, the timing at which the big winning opening count-up effect is performed and the large winning opening are performed. Regardless of the number of consecutive winning opening count-up effects, this large winning opening count-up effect can be completed appropriately without delaying more than necessary. By clearly separating the display from the variable display after the end of the special game, it becomes possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. Will be. In particular, by configuring the total time of the execution time of the big winning opening count-up effect for the specified number of counts to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo, a plurality of games are set just before the end of the final round game. Even if the game ball continuously enters the big winning opening and the big winning opening count-up effect is performed multiple times, the big winning opening count-up effect will be performed within the big hit end demo period. It will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. It is possible to clarify the delimiter.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the execution condition of the later large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect is performed. By starting the execution of the subsequent big prize opening count-up effect after the end, it is possible to prevent the processing of the count effect from becoming complicated, and the two large winning opening count-up effects will be separated. By clarifying, the count-up display of the cumulative prize balls will not be unsightly for the player, and the player will be satisfied with how the cumulative prize balls are increasing one after another at a good tempo on the screen. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value and the emphasis effect is performed due to the occurrence of the over prize, or when the over prize occurs in the situation where the emphasis effect is performed. By executing this emphasis effect and over-winning effect in duplicate, there are irregular timings when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific number, and irregular timings when over-prize occurs. By the appearance of both effects, it is possible to clearly notify the player that it is a special situation that is rarely matched, so that the player's sense of exhilaration and achievement can be further enhanced, and as a result, the game It is possible to improve the interest of the.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a specific error having a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, and an over prize or a bonus prize occurs. By limiting the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect, it is possible not to overlook that a serious error has occurred in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, an over-winning effect And even if the bonus winning effect is allowed to be executed, no actual harm will occur. On the contrary, if the over-winning effect is hindered by the error notification effect, the player's willingness to play may be diminished. I'm going to run. In this way, by appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of the over-winning according to the type of the error generated in the gaming machine, the player's willingness to play the game without excessively hindering the occurrence of the over-winning effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the consecutive villas are continued, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed not only during the execution of the special game but also in the electric support state after the end of the special game. It is expected that the players will proceed with the game while expecting to further increase the cumulative number of prize balls in the villa, which will further increase the motivation of the players for the occurrence of big hits and improve the operating rate of the gaming machines. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 arranged in the right side area PA2, while the left side area PA1 By configuring so that the bonus winning effect is not executed even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged in, the bonus winning effect occurs in the dark, and the bonus winning effect is rather monotonous. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming a rut (become a rut), and as a result of launching a game ball aiming at winning the big winning opening 54, the joy of winning the general winning opening 64 that occurs incidentally is further enhanced. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus-winning occur at substantially the same time during the execution of the special game, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect are duplicated to enter the large winning opening 54. As a result of playing a game aiming at the entry of a game ball, both the accompanying over-winning and bonus winning can be clearly notified to the player, so that the fun of the special game can be further enhanced. It becomes possible to prevent the staging during the big hit from becoming monotonous, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while limiting the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the interval period immediately after the final round game is executed. By allowing, one of the winning effects (over winning effect or bonus winning effect) occurs intermittently even though the special game is notified that the special game will end during the execution of the jackpot end demo. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being produced without a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus winnings occur within a predetermined period during the special game, the execution of the multiple bonus winning effects is permitted, while the predetermined during the special game. If multiple over-winnings occur within the period, only the over-winning effect corresponding to the first over-winning of the multiple over-winnings will be executed, and the over-winning effect will be dark. It is possible to prevent the over-winning effect from becoming monotonous (becoming a rut), and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the prize ball signal can be output once when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 64, but one gaming ball enters the large winning opening 54. By configuring the prize ball signal to be output twice, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed by the data display. It is possible to notify the player and use it as a judgment material for selecting a gaming machine or as reference information for the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls is notified by numerical information (for example, "1000 pt"), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the cumulative number of prize balls is used as image information such as an icon or a meter. It may be configured to notify by.

Further, in the above embodiment, the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villas has been illustrated and described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even if the above feature configuration is applied to the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls (number of big hit middle prize balls) during the execution of one big hit game. Similar effects can be achieved.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration. The explanation is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described in order. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment employs a small hit RUSH in which "small hits" frequently occur as a result of a hit / fail determination of a special symbol when the gaming state is a latent probability changing gaming state. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described later.

The validity determination of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table of the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated. ). In this special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit, small hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 56, in the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated in the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, the random number value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". If it corresponds to, it becomes a big hit, and if it is a game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, it is a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 818". Will be. That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1/320" to the high probability "1/80". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is designed to be equal between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the winning / failing determination does not correspond to the big hit, in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability of "1 / 1.1". The winning probability of a small hit is designed to have the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In this second embodiment, a small hit is set only for the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, but for example, a small hit is also set for the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is performed. However, the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol may be configured to win a small hit with a higher probability.

In the second embodiment, the result of the hit / fail determination of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit, and while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable display of the jackpot), the other is displayed. When the hit / fail determination of the special symbol of is executed, it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the hit / fail determination of the other special symbol, and only a small hit or a miss is derived. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the result of the hit / miss judgment is forcibly replaced with the big hit. That is, in the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random number value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 204". In this case, the result of the hit / fail judgment is forcibly out of order (replaced from the big hit to out of order), and when the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the special symbol hit disorder When the numerical value corresponds to the range of "0 to 818", the result of the applicability determination is forcibly out of order (replaced from the big hit to out of order). As a variation example, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol winning / failing lottery table, a table for big hit no lottery that does not include the jackpot judgment value (random number range) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the special symbol is prepared. During the variable display of the big hit of the special symbol, the small hit lottery is performed in which the result of the winning / failing judgment is only a small hit or a miss by referring to the table dedicated to the big hit non-lottery process instead of the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table. The method may be adopted. In this modification, if the specifications are such that a small hit is not set as a result of the hit / fail judgment, a method of immediately determining the hit / miss may be adopted without performing the hit / fail judgment.

Next, the jackpot type (breakdown of jackpots) of the second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the big hit type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol big hit symbol table shown in FIG. 57.

FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random value, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are displayed. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and 1
The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 in the round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) have 4 rounds specified for the jackpot game, and a big prize in one round game. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

FIG. 57B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are set for the symbol random value per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot. It is sorted into (symbol group I). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group E), the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific big hit (symbol group F), the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) have four rounds specified for the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game. ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Of the various jackpot types, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot is an opportunity to execute a long-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers a short-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, in the long-opening round game, the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 54 or easily entered. It is a game. The short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a predetermined number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or is difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54.

Although not shown, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small hit symbols (symbol group), and the first one is selected. 2 At the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the selected small hit symbol (symbol group) is to be stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of the small hit symbol, the opening / closing pattern (opening time, opening number of times) of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game may be configured to be different.

Subsequently, the gaming state of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, "normal game state", "time saving game state", "latent probability game state", and "probability variation game state" are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", and ( 2) The game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "latent probability game state (latent probability change game state)" or "latent probability change state". However, (3) the gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol probability fluctuation function being activated is called a "time saving state" or a "time saving gaming state", and (4). ) The state in which all the functions are not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable gaming state", the "latent probabilistic gaming state", and the "time-saving gaming state" are all advantageous gaming states for the player as compared with the "normal gaming state". In addition, each gaming state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variable game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". Here, regarding the function of shortening the variation time of the special symbol, it suffices that the variation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the subject of the game in the game state, is shortened. In other words, it can be said that the special symbol variation time shortening function is operating because the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game. , In the game state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game, the variation time of the second special symbol may be shortened.

FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table according to the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, the game state to be transferred after the end of the big hit game is set for each big hit type (type of symbol group). In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) game at the time of big hit winning. It is set according to the state. The number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol) is the number of probability fluctuations (the number of probability variation operations) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated and the variation time in which the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated. It is set based on the number of shortened times (number of times of shortened operation) and the number of times of electric support (number of times of electric support operation) in which the electric chew support function is activated. In addition, "ST" is a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the jackpot probability is set to a high probability up to the specified number of fluctuation display times. In other words, the probability change state (probability change game state) is maintained up to the specified number of fluctuation display times, but if a big hit does not occur within the specified change display number, the number-separated probability change machine that shifts to the normal state (normal game state) is used. It is called "ST machine". In that sense, the specified number of variable displays is hereinafter also referred to as "specified number of STs" or "number of STs".

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" is won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game The latent game state is set as the game state. When shifting to the latent game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. This latent game state continues until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of ST times (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next change display of the special symbol.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "70 times", and the electric support number "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", and "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" are won in the second special symbol, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state set after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the above. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state. In the case of a state or a latent game state, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set, and the latent probabilistic game is performed after the jackpot game ends. When shifting to the state, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol. Similarly, the latent game state continues until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of ST times (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next change display of the special symbol.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "70 times", and the electric support number "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

As described above, the occurrence of a big hit can be a trigger for the transition of the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small hit is not a trigger for the transition of the gaming state. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the final round, which is the end condition of the gaming state (for example, the variation display of the 100th rotation of the probabilistic gaming state and the latent probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving game). Except for the change display of the 70th rotation of the state), the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed with the winning of the small hit as an opportunity. That is, if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the time-saving gaming state. The game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game also becomes the time-saving game state.
If the gaming state before the small hit occurs is the probabilistic gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the probabilistic gaming state, and if the gaming state before the small hit occurs is the latent probabilistic gaming state, the small hit The game state during the hit game and after the small hit game is also a latent game state.

Subsequently, the effect mode of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variation mode are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, depending on the game state (or variation pattern selection state) and the like. Therefore, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set, and a variable effect corresponding to the set effect mode is executed.

Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving mode" is set, and the gaming state is the latent gaming state. When, the "latent mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the "probability mode" is set. However, when shifting to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state, latent probability gaming state, probability variation gaming state), the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. In, a special effect mode is set, and a normal effect mode is set when the predetermined number of variable displays is completed. The predetermined number of times is "4 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. This means that the cumulative number of fluctuations displayed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". That is, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, it means that the total number of times of the number of times of variation of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol have reached "4 times". As a variation example thereof, only the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times), or only the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times). As an opportunity, the special mode may be terminated (the mode may be shifted to the normal mode). Then, when any of the effect modes is set, the background image (decorative pattern is displayed on the back) dedicated to the effect mode on the screen as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the person is staying in the effect mode. The background image) is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Subsequently, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a comparison table of fluctuation times of special symbols in the second embodiment. In this second embodiment, the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted, but in reality, as in the first embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

In (A) in the figure, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit or a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time (1000 seconds) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In (B) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, and the latent probabilistic gaming state is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "0." When the result of the hit / miss judgment is a small hit.
It is set to "5 seconds", and when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, it is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds".

Subsequently, the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table, (B) in the figure shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) in the figure shows a normal electric accessory opening pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the probability of hitting a normal symbol is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of a normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support is provided. When the function (probability fluctuation function of a normal symbol) is operating, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the second embodiment, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support is set. When the function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is operating, it is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "opening for 1 second → closing for 2 seconds → closing for 1 second" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. It is set to "open → close for 2 seconds → open for 1 second", and is set to "open for 5.9 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated. That is, as an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, so the total opening time is "3 seconds", and in the high base state, it is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Subsequently, simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are executed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71 is executed. A specification (a so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel at the same time. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation-reserved ball of the first special symbol and the operation-reserved ball of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are corresponding to the winning / fail lottery and the variable display. Etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a long period of time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the other special symbol. Therefore, the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed during the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol. In the following, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit fluctuation display", and the fluctuation display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit fluctuation display". The variable display of is called "off-the-shelf variable display".

(Fluctuation interruption processing)
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one special symbol is the big hit variation display, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display. In the situation where the variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the variation display of one special symbol is before the end of the variation display of the other. When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the end of the small hit game ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the interruption of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is paused (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are displayed. When the total time of is reached the predetermined fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuating forced stop processing)
On the other hand, when the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the big hit variation display and the other special symbol variation display is the small hit variation display or the missed variation display, one of them. In the situation where the big hit fluctuation display of the special symbol of 1 and the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends. Before, when the big hit fluctuation display of one special symbol is completed, the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol is set in advance and the specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). Even before reaching, at the end of the jackpot variation display of one special symbol, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated in conjunction with or synchronized with it. When the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol (confirmed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit variation display shall be replaced with a symbol that is out of the small hit symbol. .. That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off variation display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol and the special game (small hit game) in the other special symbol compete with each other. If the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a jackpot variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts variable after that is other than the jackpot variation display. Change display (that is, loss variation display or small hit variation display, and if it is a hit / fail random number corresponding to a big hit in the hit / fail judgment process, the hit / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with a miss and the missed variation display is used). Is desirable. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is out of order and the fluctuation display (whether or not it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit in the hit / fail judgment process). If it is a random number, the result of the hit / fail judgment may be forcibly replaced with the wrong number, and the wrong result may be displayed.

≪Playability of small hit RUSH≫
Next, the playability of the small hit RUSH (latent mode) will be described. In the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the small hit is frequently made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball being inserted into the second starting port 52, and the small hit is made until the big hit is won. It is a game that aims to generate hit games continuously and intensively.

When the gaming state is the latent gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. In this latent game state (low base state), if the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting opening 52, it is possible or easy to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. Further, in this latent game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the first when the small hit is won. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52.

At this time, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of is finished in an extremely short time, and the small hit game is started immediately. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 is configured to perform a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after performing an opening operation for 1 second (excluding a third opening operation). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 is the ordinary electric accessory 522 (movable) during the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hit game, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is arranged diagonally below the large prize. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the big winning mouth 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the gaming ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to display the variation of the second special symbol with high frequency, and until the next big hit occurs. It is a game that allows small hit games to be executed frequently. As a result, every time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the large prize opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player It is possible to advance the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small hit games are more likely to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the game playability of the small hit RUSH to only the latent game state and to suppress the increase in the number of balls held by the small hit game for the game states other than the latent game state, the following measures are taken. Has been done.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.01) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. To. In this gaming state (high base state), if the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting opening 52, it is extremely easy to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. .. Further, even in this time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. high.

Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is open for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display ends in an extremely short time, and the small hit game starts immediately. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right side region PA2. The game ball to be played is extremely easy to enter the open ordinary electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the large winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed and operated (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operating gate 53. Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 is opened to the opening operation is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), this immediately released ordinary electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522. That is, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric accessory 522 (second starting port 52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 is in the open state of the ordinary electric accessory. It is extremely easy to enter the ball into the object 522 (second starting opening 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the large winning opening 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state (high base state), the gaming ball reaches the large winning opening 54 even if small hits frequently occur in the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls to be played by small hit games.

Further, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, but the second special symbol is set. Since the fluctuation time of is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 52 and plays a game aiming at a small hit, the second special The efficiency of digesting the symbols is very poor, and it is not possible to make small hit games occur frequently. In the variation display of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be relatively high (second special). The fluctuation time of the design does not become extremely long). That is, in the variation display of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state (variation display within 4 rotations), the variation display after the end of the variation display of the predetermined number of rotations (variation display after the fifth rotation) is more than. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol (average value of the fluctuation time) is shortened, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the cumulative prize ball number is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, and the player can be notified of the cumulative prize ball number. It is configured in. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of this small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, but the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (general winning opening count). Up production) is configured to be performed. Further, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game performed by the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol being the small hit during the execution of this small hit RUSH (latent mode). It is preferable that the cumulative number of prize balls is additionally displayed (a large winning opening count-up effect). As a modification, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed and the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed (general winning opening). It may be configured so that the count-up effect) is not performed.

In addition, also in the second embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the same action and effect as the above-mentioned first embodiment can be obtained, and as a result, the interest of the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

As a modification of the second embodiment, the second starting port 52 may be configured as a constantly open winning opening. That is, in this modification, the first start port 51 and the second start port 52 are configured as a non-variable start port (a start port that is always open), and a normal electric accessory is not mounted. FIG. 63 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, the second starting opening 52 is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the large winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the second starting opening 52. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 52 is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the right) that mainly flows down the right side region PA2 can enter. That is, the second starting port 52 also serves as a general winning opening 64 in which the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 can always enter, regardless of whether it is in the special gaming state or the non-special gaming state. It is configured so that you can always enter the ball. In this modification, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning effect and the cumulative number of winning balls are added and displayed (general winning opening count). Up production) is performed. When a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the special game, only the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (general winning opening count-up effect), which is a bonus. The prize-winning effect may be configured so as not to be performed. Further, even if the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed and the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed. (General winning opening count-up effect) may be configured so as not to be performed.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration. The explanation is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

[Main control display device]
FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing the main control display device 27 of the third embodiment. The main control display device 27 is an LED display device whose lighting is controlled by the main control board 100, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 20. As shown in FIG. 64, the main control display device 27 includes a first special symbol table device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special symbol hold lamp 74, and a normal symbol. Various display means such as a display device 75, a normal symbol hold lamp 76, a round indicator lamp 77, a status indicator lamp 78, a right-handed indicator lamp 79, and an error indicator lamp Er are provided.

The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of eight LED segments G to N, and the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segment, and the blinking of the LED segment is stopped and lit. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed by switching to. More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol, only the LED segments M and N are blinking, and the other LED segments are extinguished, and the definite display of the first special symbol is a pass / fail judgment. If the result is off, only the LED segments M and N are on and the other LED segments are off, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is correct, it depends on the type of special game to be executed. LED segment The combination of lighting and extinguishing of LED segments G to N is different (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, LED segments G to N are lit / lit / lit / extinguished / extinguished / lit / lit / lit or extinguished.・ Turn on, turn off, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off, and if the 16R jackpot is a 16R jackpot, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off.・ Turn on / off / turn on / turn off / turn on / off). In addition, each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp, or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of eight LED segments Q to X, and the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed according to the blinking pattern of the LED segment, and the blinking of the LED segment is stopped and lit. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed by switching to. More specifically, in the variation display of the second special symbol, only the LED segments W and X are blinking, and the other LED segments are extinguished. If the result is off, only the LED segments W and X are on and the other LED segments are off, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is correct, it depends on the type of special game to be executed. LED segment The combination of lighting and extinguishing of LED segments Q to X is different (for example, in the case of a 4R jackpot, LED segments Q to X are lit, lit, extinguished, extinguished, lit, lit, lit, lit, and extinguished.・ Turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off, turn off, and if the 16R jackpot is a 16R jackpot, turn off, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn on, turn off, turn on, turn off・ On / off / off / off / on / on /
It goes out). In addition, each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp, or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The first special symbol hold lamp 73 is composed of two LED segments O and P, and displays the number of operation hold balls (maximum four) of the first special symbol by displaying the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED segments. Similarly, the second special symbol hold lamp 74 is composed of two LED segments Y and Z, and displays the number of operation hold balls (maximum 4) of the second special symbol by displaying, blinking, and extinguishing the LED segment. do. More specifically, when one LED segment is an off display, 0 is shown, when it is a blinking display, 1 is shown, and when it is a on display, 2 is shown. (For example, when the LED segment O is a lighting display and the LED segment P is a lighting display, it indicates that the number of reserved first special symbols is 4 and the LED segment is represented. When O is blinking and the LED segment P is off, it indicates that the number of reserved first special symbols is one). In addition, each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp, or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The ordinary symbol display device 75 is composed of one LED segment C, and performs variable display and definite display of the ordinary symbol. More specifically, the variable display of the normal symbol is a state in which the LED segment C is blinking, and the definite display of the normal symbol is a state in which the LED segment C is turned off when the result of the pass / fail judgment is incorrect. If the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, the LED segment C is lit. The LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The normal symbol hold lamp 76 is composed of two LED segments A and B, and displays the number of operation hold balls (up to 4) of the normal symbol by the lighting / blinking display of the LED segment. More specifically, when one LED segment is an off display, 0 is shown, when it is a blinking display, 1 is shown, and when it is a on display, 2 is shown. (For example, when the LED segment A is a lighting display and the LED segment B is a lighting display, it indicates that the number of reserved symbols is 4 and the LED segment A is represented. When the blinking display and the LED segment B are off display, it indicates that the number of reserved symbols is one). In addition, each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp, or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The round indicator lamp 77 is composed of a left indicator lamp 67a and a right indicator lamp 67b, and displays the number of times the round game is executed in the special game (specified number of rounds: the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated). The left indicator light 67a is composed of two LED segments, and the right indicator light 67b is composed of seven LED segments, and the specified number of rounds of the special game is displayed by the combination of the lighting display of each LED segment (for example). Of the seven LED segments of the right indicator light 67b, when only the central LED segment is turned off and the other LED segments are turned on, that is, the upper part, the upper left part, the lower left part, the upper right part, the lower right part, and the lower part. When the six LED segments are turned on, the combination indicating "0" is displayed). For example, when the numerical value of "10" is lit and displayed on the round indicator light 77 (that is, the left indicator light 77a, which is an indicator lamp indicating the second digit of the number of rounds, is lit and displayed in a combination indicating the numerical value of "1". When the right indicator light 77b, which is the indicator light indicating the first digit of the number of rounds, is lit and displayed in a combination indicating the numerical value of "0"), the specified number of rounds of the special game is 10 times (10 rounds). It is shown that there is. In addition, each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp, or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The status indicator 78 is composed of two LED segments D and E, and displays the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the operating status of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol by the lighting display of the LED segment. .. In addition, each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp, or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The right-handed indicator light 79 is composed of one LED segment F, and is in a game state in which a game ball should be launched aiming at the right side of the game area PA by the lighting display of the LED segment (a game state in which the right-handed indicator light 79 should be hit). Display whether or not there is. More specifically, when the game state is such that the game ball should be launched aiming at the right side of the game area PA such as the high base state or the special game state (the game state where the game ball should be hit right), the LED segment F is lit and displayed. , In a gaming state in which a gaming ball should be launched aiming at the left side of the gaming area PA such as a low base state (non-special gaming state) (a gaming state in which a game ball should be hit to the left), the LED segment F is turned off. The LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

The error indicator light Er is composed of one LED segment Er, and the lighting display of the LED segment Er informs the error occurrence status (whether or not an error has occurred) of the gaming machine PM. More specifically, when an error has occurred, the LED segment Er is turned on, and when no error has occurred, the LED segment Er is turned off. However, if a specific error has occurred, the LED segment Er may be turned off (for example, if the first error or the second error described above has occurred, the LED segment Er may be turned on, but described above. If a third error or an error related to the setting function described later (an error that occurs when the setting value is out of range or when the setting change state is terminated without confirming the setting change) occurs, the LED segment Er goes out, etc.). The LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

[Prize-related production]
Next, the winning-related production of the third embodiment will be described. The winning-related effect is an effect executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the large winning opening 54, the general winning opening 64, or the like during the execution of the big hit game. This winning-related effect includes a large winning opening winning effect and a general winning opening winning effect, as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18 and the like) described above.

<Large prize opening prize production>
The big winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball wins the big winning opening 54 during the execution of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 18, the large winning opening winning effect includes a large winning opening normal winning effect, a large winning opening over winning effect, and a large winning opening count-up effect. The contents of this large winning opening winning production (large winning opening normal winning production, large winning opening over winning production, large winning opening count-up production) have already been described in detail in the first embodiment, so the basic explanation is given. Omit. In the following, as an execution condition of the large winning opening over winning effect (over winning effect), a game ball that exceeds the specified count number during the execution of one round game (in this embodiment, the eleventh and subsequent game balls). ) Enters the large winning opening 54, and the excess amount of game balls is effectively detected by the large winning opening switch 541 (that is, over winning occurs), which is the "over winning effect execution condition". Also called. Further, the large prize count-up effect is the above-mentioned effect display in which the number of prize balls given based on the entry of the game ball into the large prize opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in the count-up format. The winning opening count-up effect is not limited to the one that counts up and displays the number of prize balls one by one, and may be the one that counts up and displays the number of prize balls by two or more (for example, 1 to the large winning opening 54). If the number of prize balls for each incoming ball is 15, the count-up display of 15 pieces may be performed at once such as 0 pieces → 15 pieces, or 0 pieces → 3 pieces → 6 pieces → 9 pieces. → 12 pieces → 15 pieces may be divided by a predetermined number (here, “5”) and a count-up display may be performed), a random number (for example, to the large winning opening 54). If the number of prize balls for one entry is 15, the order is 0 → 23 → 45 → 11 → 64 → 32 → 15, and the first 0 and the last 15 Other than that, the count-up display may be performed by displaying only that the numerical value is fluctuating (the same applies to the above-mentioned first embodiment and second embodiment). In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball wins the big winning opening 54, (b) the game ball enters the big winning opening 54, and (c) the game ball It is detected by the big prize opening switch 541, (d) the main control board 100 sends the big winning opening winning command, and (e) the staging control board 200 receives the big winning opening winning command. Is used synonymously.

<General prize opening prize production>
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening 64. As shown in FIG. 18, the general winning opening winning effect includes a general winning opening normal winning effect and a general winning opening count-up effect. Since the contents of this general winning opening winning effect (general winning opening normal winning effect, general winning count-up effect) have already been described in detail in the first embodiment, the basic description will be omitted. In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball wins the general winning opening 64, (b) the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, and (c) the game ball It is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, (d) the main control board 100 transmits the right general winning opening winning command, and (e) the staging control board 200 receives the right general winning opening winning command. And are used synonymously.

<Characteristics of prize-related production>
Next, the features of the winning-related production (large winning opening winning production, general winning opening winning production) of the third embodiment will be described. In addition, the component of the prize-related effect of the third embodiment and the component of the prize-related effect of the above-mentioned first embodiment may be appropriately combined, and when these are combined, any of the components may be combined. It is also possible to omit, replace, or change part or all of.

≪Emphasis on the cumulative number of prize balls≫
First, the highlighting effect (highlighting) of the cumulative number of prize balls in the third embodiment will be described. As described above, the emphasis effect is that the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a predetermined specific value by entering the game ball into the big prize opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the big hit game. It is a production to inform.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of the emphasis effect. As shown in FIG. 65, the highlighting effect (highlighting) is a highlighting image ("2500pt achieved" in the illustrated example) showing that the value of the cumulative prize balls has reached a specific value in the highlighting area 735 in the center of the screen. ) Is displayed. The highlighted image "2500pt achieved" in the illustrated example shows the characters "2500pt", which is the display corresponding to the specific value (2500) achieved by the cumulative prize ball number value, and the display indicating that the specific value has been reached. It is an image combined with the characters of "achievement". This highlighted image can be displayed separately from the cumulative prize ball number display (cumulative prize ball number display image) displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, and this highlighted image is displayed. During this period, the highlighted image and the cumulative prize ball number display (cumulative prize ball number display image) coexist. In this embodiment, the details will be described later, but since the execution time of the highlighting effect (display time of the highlighted image) is set to "3 seconds", when the highlighted image appears on the screen, This highlighted image and the cumulative prize ball number display (cumulative prize ball number display image) are displayed at the same time for only 3 seconds.

The emphasis effect is executed when a predetermined execution condition (referred to as "emphasis effect execution condition") is satisfied during the execution of the jackpot game. This emphasis effect execution condition is established when the value of the above-mentioned cumulative prize ball counter reaches a predetermined specific value. This specific value is a numerical value corresponding to a multiple value of a predetermined number of prize balls (2500). That is, every time the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000 ...) of the predetermined number of prize balls, the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied, and this emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied. The emphasis production will be performed based on this.

FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing an emphasis effect pattern table. This highlighting effect pattern table is referred to when selecting the highlighting effect pattern (display pattern of the highlighted image) to be displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 66, in this emphasis effect pattern table, the value (specific value) of the cumulative prize ball number counter, the determined emphasis effect pattern, and the display contents thereof are associated with each other. In this embodiment, when the value of the cumulative prize ball count counter reaches "2500", the highlighting pattern PK1 is executed in which the highlight image showing the characters "2500 pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen, and the cumulative prize ball count is executed. When the value of the counter reaches "5000", the highlighting pattern PK2 is executed in which the highlighted image showing the characters "5000 pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen, and the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "7500". Then, the highlighting pattern PK3 is executed in which the highlighting image showing the characters "7500pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen, and when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "10000", the screen says "10000pt achieved". When the highlighting pattern PK4 is executed and the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches "12500", the highlighted image showing the characters "12500pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen. When the highlighting pattern PK5 is executed and the value of the cumulative prize ball count counter reaches "15,000", the highlighting pattern PK6 is executed in which the highlighting image indicating the characters "15,000pt achieved" is enlarged and displayed on the screen. To. Although only 6 types of emphasis effect patterns PK1 to PK6 are shown in FIG. 66, the value of the cumulative prize ball number counter is a double value of the predetermined number of prize balls even after the emphasis effect pattern PK6 is executed. Every time it reaches 17500, 20000, 22500 ...), the emphasis effect pattern corresponding to the multiple value is executed. As the emphasis effect pattern, until the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value (97500) of the predetermined prize ball number, each emphasis effect pattern corresponding to a multiple of 2500 exists, but after that, there is an emphasis effect pattern. May be configured so that the emphasis effect pattern is not executed even if the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 100,000, 102500, etc.). Further, after the value of the cumulative prize ball count counter reaches a double value (97500) of the predetermined prize ball number, the value of the cumulative prize ball number counter is different from the multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (99999). A special emphasis effect pattern such as "Achievement of 99999 pt" by reaching is displayed only once, and after that, the value of the cumulative prize ball count counter is a multiple value of the predetermined prize ball number (for example, 100,000 or 102500). Etc.) may be reached so that the emphasis effect pattern is not executed. By configuring in this way, while reducing the number of types of emphasis effect patterns (in other words, while configuring so that there are no endless types of emphasis effect patterns), expectation of winning balls in the consecutive villas described later. It is possible to always perform the emphasis effect until the prize ball is obtained, which greatly exceeds the value (for example, 10 times).

Here, in the present embodiment, in the above-mentioned plurality of types of emphasis effect patterns, two consecutive emphasis effect patterns are configured so as not to be executed in duplicate. That is, of the two consecutive emphasis effect patterns, the execution period or execution timing of one emphasis effect pattern (for example, emphasis effect pattern PK1) and the execution period or execution timing of the other emphasis effect pattern (for example, emphasis effect pattern PK2). And do not overlap each other (including cases where the entire execution periods of both do not overlap and cases where part of the execution periods of both do not overlap). Here, tentatively, while the emphasis effect pattern (for example, the emphasis effect pattern PK1) of one of the two consecutive emphasis effect patterns is being executed, the execution condition of the other emphasis effect pattern (for example, the emphasis effect pattern PK2) is satisfied (for example). For example, when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches 5000), even if the execution condition is satisfied, the other emphasis effect pattern may not be executed so that the display content is not complicated. As a modification, tentatively, the execution condition of one of the two consecutive emphasis effect patterns (for example, the emphasis effect pattern PK1) is satisfied while the other emphasis effect pattern (for example, the emphasis effect pattern PK2) is being executed. (For example, when the value of the cumulative prize ball count counter reaches 5000), the execution of one emphasis effect pattern is forcibly terminated so that the display content is not complicated, and the other emphasis effect pattern is executed instead. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the display size of the highlighted image (highlighted effect display) on the screen may be appropriately changed according to the type of each highlighted effect pattern. That is, the display size of the highlighting image (highlighting effect display) may be different depending on the type of each highlighting effect pattern. For example, in order to prevent the highlighted image (enlarged image) from protruding from the screen due to an increase in the number of digits of the cumulative prize balls indicated by the highlighted image, the digits of the cumulative number of prize balls that have reached a specific number. When the number exceeds a predetermined number, the size of the highlighted image may be reduced. As a modification, the emphasis effect pattern when the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30000 ...) of the specific prize ball number (for example, 10000) is other emphasis effect. In order to make the degree of blessing for the player stronger than the pattern (make it feel more blessed), increase the display size of the highlighted image (highlighted effect display) or increase the execution time of the highlighted effect. It may be longer (eg, 5 seconds instead of 3 seconds).

≪Special effect of emphasis production≫
Next, the special effects that accompany the occurrence of the emphasis effect will be described. In this embodiment, when the highlighting effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot game, a special effect (adding a predetermined effect) is applied to the highlighted image at the start and end of the highlighting effect. An effect display (also referred to simply as a "special effect" or simply an "additional effect" or "additional display") is performed, and a specific sound effect that audibly notifies the start and end of the emphasis effect. Output is done.

The special effect display includes a special effect display in which the highlighted image itself is deformed (enlargement / reduction, inversion, movement, etc.) or changes (color tone change, brightness change, color / black and white switching, etc.) to exert a special effect, and a highlight display. There is a special effect display in which another image different from the image gives a visual effect to the display of the highlighted image. In this embodiment, the special effect display includes a fade-in display in which the highlighted image gradually appears, a fade-out display in which the highlighted image gradually disappears, and a specific effect image (for example, innumerable small ones) around the highlighted image. There is an effect display that displays (star images, charged images, etc.). Mainly, the effect display and the fade-in display are executed when the highlighted image appears, and the fade-out display is executed when the highlighted image is erased (the effect display is not executed when the highlighted image is erased). As a modification of this embodiment, the special effect display may be applied only at the start or the end of the emphasis effect. Further, as the special effect display, a concealed display in which a blurred image or a mosaic image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the highlighted image may be performed.

The specific sound effect is a specific sound effect that is output at the start and end of the emphasis effect. The specific sound effects include a specific sound effect A (for example, a voice called "Dokhan") that is output almost at the same time at the start of the emphasis effect, and a specific sound effect B (for example, "pico") that is output at the end of the emphasis effect. There is a voice). As a modification, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may be output at the start of the emphasis effect, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may not be output at the end of the emphasis effect. On the contrary, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) may be output at the end of the emphasis effect, and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) may not be output at the start of the emphasis effect. Further, as another modification, the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) output at the start of the emphasis effect and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) output at the end of the emphasis effect are produced by the same sound. It may be configured. If the specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) output at the start of the emphasis effect and the specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) output at the end of the emphasis effect are the same sound, both are used. The output level (sound level) of the voice may be the same, or the output level (voice level) of both voices may be different (for example, the output level of the specific sound effect A may be higher than the output level of the specific sound effect B). It may be raised, or the output level of the specific sound effect B may be raised higher than the output level of the specific sound effect A). It is preferable that the specific sound effects A and B are configured to fade out (gradually lower the volume) toward the end of output, and by configuring in this way, the specific sound effects are started. The impact can be strengthened. In such a configuration, the impact can be further strengthened by configuring to fade in (gradually increase the volume) immediately after the output of the specific sound effects A and B starts. In such a configuration, it is more effective to make the fade-out period (for example, 1 second) longer than the fade-in period (for example, 0.3 seconds) (instantly increase the volume to the maximum volume and then gradually increase the volume). You can have a slowdown to lower the volume).

Next, the execution timing of the emphasis effect, the special effect display, and the output of the specific sound effect during the execution of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 67 is a time chart showing the execution timing of the highlighting effect, the special effect display, and the output of the specific sound effect during the execution of the jackpot game.

First, after the big hit game is started, at the timing T1, the execution period of the big hit start demo ends, and the display of the cumulative prize ball number display is started. Next, at the timing T2, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value, the execution of the emphasis effect is started. At the start of this highlighting effect, a special effect display (effect display in the illustrated example) that applies a special effect to the appearance of the highlighted image is performed, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect A) that notifies the start of the highlighting effect is performed. Is output. Then, at the timing T3, the execution of the emphasis effect ends. At the end of this highlighting effect, a special effect display (fade-out display in the illustrated example) that applies a special effect to the disappearance of the highlighted image is performed, and a specific sound effect (specific sound effect B) that notifies the end of the highlighting effect is performed. Is output. Then, at the timing T4, the display of the cumulative prize ball number display ends, and then the current jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 67, at the start (timing T1) and the end (timing T4) of the cumulative prize ball number display, the special effect display for applying a special effect to the cumulative prize ball number display is not performed. , No special sound effect is output to notify the start and end of the cumulative prize ball number display. In this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect and the execution period of the special effect display at timings T2 and T3 are shown as substantially the same period, but the output period of the specific sound effect is the execution period of the special effect display. May be longer than. With such a configuration, the visibility of the emphasis effect (the visibility of the display regarding the number of acquired prize balls) is not impaired more than necessary by the special effect display, while the specific sound effect that is not related to the visibility is special. By continuing the output even after the execution of the effect display is completed, the auditory blessing period for the player becomes longer, and the synergistic effect of the visual blessing and the auditory blessing can be further expected. .. Further, in this time chart, the output period of the specific sound effect at the timing T2 is shown as a shorter period than the execution period of the emphasis effect, but it is the same as (or substantially the same as) the execution period of the emphasis effect or from the execution period of the emphasis effect. May be long term. Further, in this time chart, the start timing of the specific sound effect and the start timing of the special effect display at the timing T2 are shown as the timings prior to the start timing of the emphasis effect, but they are the same timing (or substantially the same timing). May be good. Further, in this time chart, the end timing of the specific sound effect and the end timing of the special effect display at the timing T3 are shown as the timings after the end timing of the emphasis effect, but they are the same timing (or substantially the same timing). May be good.

≪Execution time of emphasis production≫
Next, the execution time of the emphasis effect will be described. FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the execution time of the emphasis effect and the execution time of the jackpot end demo.

The execution time of the highlighting effect is the time from the start to the end of the display of the highlighting image (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of prize balls. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "20 seconds" common to all big hit types (big hit games) as in the first embodiment, and the execution time of the emphasis effect is this. It is set to "3 seconds", which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In this embodiment, even when the emphasis effect pattern is executed by any of the plurality of emphasis effect patterns (enhancement effect patterns PK1 to PK6 in the illustrated example of FIG. 66), the emphasis effect effect is performed. The execution time is set to "3 seconds". As a modification, the execution time of the emphasis effect may be different depending on the type of the emphasis effect pattern. For example, the larger the value of the cumulative number of prize balls targeted for this emphasis effect display (enlarged display), the more the emphasis effect is produced. The execution time may be set to be long (it may tend to be long). As described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time (interval period) provided after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game elapses to the end of the jackpot game. Is. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time (interval period) provided after the end of the final round game. Note that this interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" and is not provided only after the end of the final round game of the jackpot game, but between each round game (for example, the first round). It should be added that the interval time (interval period) is also the period during the second round and the period during which the large winning opening 54 is closed between the fifth and sixth rounds. The interval time after the end of the final round game is the remaining time of the final round game in which the entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening 54 may be effectively detected within the interval time (the remaining time of the final round game). It is set as a grace time). On the other hand, the execution time of the big hit end demo is a big hit separated from the final round game in which there is no possibility that the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54 can be effectively detected within the execution time. It is set as a preparation period for the game after the game is over.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis effect is set shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the cumulative prize balls are accumulated just before the end of the final round game. Even if the emphasis effect is executed in response to the number reaching a specific value, this emphasis effect is configured to be completed by the end of the jackpot end demo. As a result, even if the emphasis effect is executed just before the end of the final round game, the emphasis effect is performed beyond the end time of the jackpot game to the variable display after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to clarify the division between the end of the jackpot game and the start of the variation display of the first round after the end. Further, for example, when the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied with the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 of the specified count number (here, the 10th count) in the final round game of the big hit game. In order to satisfy the end condition of the final round game almost at the same time as the satisfaction of the emphasis effect execution condition, the final round game ends and the 2-second interval period starts, and this 2-second interval period At least a part of the emphasis effect will be executed inside, but for this "at least part", the display regarding the number of prize balls such as "2500 pt achieved" in the emphasis effect can be confirmed (more). Specifically, at the start of execution of the emphasis effect, a special effect display is executed and a display regarding the number of prize balls such as "Achieved 2500 pt" is made, but the specified count number in the final round game of the big hit game is large. When the emphasis effect is executed during the interval period triggered by the entry of the game ball into the winning opening 54, the display regarding the number of winning balls can be visually recognized after displaying the special effect within the interval period. In other words, the display of the number of prize balls can be visually recognized before the big hit end demo is started). With this configuration, it is necessary to confirm which pattern the emphasis effect was (which number of prize balls was achieved) before the start of the jackpot end demo period, which executes the effect related to the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to realize a natural flow of production along with the progress of the big hit game.

The execution time of the emphasis effect may be set longer than the interval time provided between each round or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo. If the emphasis effect is not completed by the end of the round game, the emphasis effect is forcibly ended at the end of the round game, at the start of the interval period after the end of the round game, or at the start of the end demo. It may be configured to do so.

≪Execution timing of emphasis production, light emission production and character production≫
Next, the execution timings of the emphasis effect, the light emission effect, and the character effect will be described. FIG. 69 is a time chart showing the execution timings of the emphasis effect, the light emission effect, and the accessory effect.

While the highlighting effect is being executed, the frame lamp 10 lights up or blinks in a special light emitting mode. Examples of this special light emitting mode include a mode in which a special light emitting color such as a rainbow color is lit and displayed, or a mode in which the special light emitting color and a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval) are blinked and displayed. .. As a modification of this special light emitting mode, a mode in which a predetermined light emitting color such as blue and a blinking display at a blinking interval shorter than a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval) may be adopted may be adopted. Further, during the execution of the emphasis effect, the board lamp 25 provided on the game board 20 (center decoration 21) may be configured to light or blink in a special light emitting mode. Further, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the frame lamp 10 may be lit or blinked in a special light emitting mode, and the panel lamp 25 may be lit or blinked in a special light emitting mode. That is, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the lighting display or blinking display by the special light emitting mode of the frame lamp 10 and the lighting display or blinking display by the special light emitting mode of the panel lamp 25 are performed substantially simultaneously (in parallel). (Including the case where the entire light emitting periods of both lamps 10 and 25 overlap and the case where a part of the light emitting periods of both lamps 10 and 25 overlap). Further, even when the highlighting effect is executed, some of the frame lamps 10 may be configured so as not to be lit or blinked in a special light emitting mode. Specifically, when the frame lamp 10 is configured to include a frame lamp A (for example, a top lamp), a frame lamp B (for example, a side lamp), and a frame lamp C (for example, a ball plate lamp), these When the highlighting effect is executed in a situation where the frame lamps A to C are lit or blinking in the normal light emitting mode, some of the frame lamps A to C are displayed during the execution of the highlighting effect. The lighting display or blinking display is displayed in the special light emitting mode (the light emitting mode is switched from the normal light emitting mode to the special light emitting mode), while the other lamps are lit or blinking in the normal light emitting mode (the light emitting mode is the normal light emitting mode). It may be configured to be maintained at). Further, in that case, the lamp (effect button lamp) mounted on the effect button 15 is also lit or blinked in the normal light emission mode regardless of whether or not the emphasis effect is executed (the light emission mode is maintained in the normal light emission mode). ) Is preferable. Similarly, even when the highlighting effect is executed, some of the lamps 25 may be configured so as not to be lit or blinked in a special light emitting mode. Specifically, when the board lamp 25 is configured to include the board lamp A and the board lamp B, it is emphasized in the situation where these board lamps A and B are lit or blinking in the normal light emitting mode. When the effect is executed, one of the panel lamps A and B is lit or blinked in a special light emitting mode (the light emitting mode changes from the normal light emitting mode to the special light emitting mode). On the other hand, the other lamp may be configured to be lit or blinking in the normal light emitting mode (maintaining the light emitting mode in the normal light emitting mode).

Further, during the execution of the highlighting effect, the accessory lamp (LED lamp provided in the movable accessory 24), which will be described later, lights up or blinks in a predetermined light emitting mode. As the predetermined light emitting mode, an embodiment in which a lighting display is performed with a predetermined light emitting color such as blue, or a flashing display is performed with the predetermined light emitting color and a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval) is exemplified.

When an error occurs in the gaming machine, the frame lamp 10 and the accessory lamp described later are lit or blinked in the error light emission mode. Examples of this error emission mode include a mode in which lighting is displayed or blinking is displayed in a specific emission color such as red. When the frame lamp 10 or the accessory lamp described later is blinked in a specific emission color, the blinking display may be performed at a predetermined blinking interval (normal blinking interval), or blinking shorter than the predetermined blinking interval. It may be displayed blinking at intervals. When an error occurs in the gaming machine in this way, the frame lamp 10 and the accessory lamp described later are lit or blinked in an error emitting mode different from the predetermined light emitting mode and the special light emitting mode. It is possible to accurately notify that the error is in progress.

Further, during the execution of the emphasis effect, the accessory effect in which the specific movable accessory 24 is driven in a predetermined operation mode is executed. As shown in FIG. 1, the movable accessory 24 is a logo accessory formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape using a translucent resin material. On the front side of the movable accessory 24, for example, a logo-shaped decorative portion in which the title name of the gaming machine is designed is provided. Inside the movable accessory 24, an accessory lamp for emitting light of the decorative portion formed on the front side is mounted. The accessory lamp is configured to have, for example, a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. As the light emitting body, a full-color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is preferably used. In the movable accessory 24, the accessory lamp emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, so that the entire decorative portion on the front side is emitted and displayed.

The bonus effect of the present embodiment can be executed by combining the effect operation of the movable bonus 24 and the light emission display of the bonus lamp. That is, the bonus effect is configured as an effect in which the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 (the accessory movable effect) and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (the accessory light emission effect) can be performed in combination.

The accessory movable effect is an effect in which the movable accessory 24 executes an effect operation according to a predetermined effect operation pattern. This accessory movable effect operates the movable accessory 24 (at a predetermined position) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol or the execution of the jackpot game on the premise that the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is completed. It is executed mainly for the purpose of exerting a visual effect by (including holding or stopping). This accessory movable effect is, for example, a descending operation of lowering the movable accessory 24 from the initial position to a predetermined movable position, and a front surface of the screen which is a position of the movable accessory 24 at a predetermined movable position (for example, a position after the descending operation). This is an effect including a holding operation of stopping and holding the movable accessory 24 for a predetermined time at the position) and an ascending operation of raising the movable accessory 24 from the predetermined movable position to the initial position.

The accessory light emitting effect is an effect in which the accessory lamp of the movable accessory 24 emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern. In the present embodiment, as the light emission pattern (light emission mode) of the accessory lamp, light emission pattern 1 (white light emission), light emission pattern 2 (blue light emission), light emission pattern 3 (yellow light emission), and light emission pattern 4 (rainbow color light emission, that is, Is set to emit light in gradations of a plurality of colors), and one light emission pattern is selected from the plurality of types of light emission patterns 1 to 4 (all of these light emission patterns are blinking modes). As described above, when the accessory lamp emits light during the execution of the enhancement effect, the light emission pattern 2 is selected. That is, the predetermined light emitting mode of the accessory lamp corresponds to the light emitting pattern 2 (blue light emission). Here, the light emission pattern of the accessory lamp is related to the high degree of expectation of a big hit, and when the accessory lamp emits light during the variable display of the special symbol, the light emission pattern 1 (white light emission) <light emission pattern 2 ( The jackpot expectation is set to increase by one step in the order of blue emission) <emission pattern 3 (yellow emission) <emission pattern 4 (rainbow emission). It should be noted that the light emission pattern of this accessory lamp is merely an example, and one light emission pattern may be configured to emit light in a plurality of types of colors, or light emission patterns having different flashing times may be prepared. Alternatively, the number of types of light emission patterns may be changed. Further, the frame lamp 10 may be configured so as to be able to adopt the light emitting mode of the light emitting patterns 1 to 4 as in the case of the accessory lamp. Further, as for the accessory lamp, similarly to the frame lamp 10, when an error occurs in the gaming machine, the lighting display or the blinking display may be performed in a specific light emitting color such as red as the error light emitting mode.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, the specific execution timings of the emphasis effect, the light emission effect, and the character effect during the execution of the jackpot game will be described.

First, at the timing T1, the jackpot game is started. At this time, the movable accessory 24 is on standby at the initial position that is the starting point of the operation, and the accessory lamp is in the non-light emitting state (light-off state). In addition, the accessory lamp may be configured to emit light in the light emission pattern 1 (white light emission) instead of the non-light emission state (in that case, "light emission" in this time chart becomes "blue light emission", and " It should be added that "non-emission" is replaced with "white emission").

Next, at the timing T2, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific number (for example, 5000), the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied, and the execution of the emphasis effect is started. Further, at this timing T2, the staging operation of the movable accessory 24 is started, and the light emission display (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) of the accessory lamp is started. That is, in this embodiment, the display of the highlighting effect, the effect operation of the movable accessory 24, and the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) are started substantially at the same time (these). The production starts in synchronization).

Then, at the timing T3, the execution of the emphasis effect ends. Further, at this timing T3, the effect operation of the movable accessory ends, and the light emission display (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) of the accessory lamp ends. That is, in this embodiment, the display of the emphasis effect, the effect operation of the movable accessory 24, and the light emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) are terminated substantially at the same time (these effects). Ends in sync).

As described above, in this embodiment, the timing of the start and end of the execution of the emphasis effect, the timing of the start and end of the operation of the movable accessory 24, and the start of light emission of the accessory lamp (or from white light emission to blue light emission). By making the timings of the start of change) and the end of light emission (or the start of change from blue light emission to white light emission) almost at the same time, these effects become a cohesive effect (a sense of unity). The flow of the production will be easy for the player to understand. Further, when executing the highlighting effect, the movable accessory 24 is operated or the accessory lamp emits light (or from white light emission to blue light emission) without ending only with the highlight display (enlarged display) of the effect display device 70. By making it (change), it is possible to further improve the satisfaction and superiority complex of the player, and it is also possible to appeal this highlighted cumulative number of prize balls to the surrounding players. .. The frame lamp 10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts / ends the light emission display in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing, or emits white light in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing. It may be configured to start / end the change from to blue emission).

As a modification, it is configured to start the execution of the emphasis effect after the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) are started. You may. According to it, there is an expectation that the emphasis effect will be executed after the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) are started respectively. Can be embraced by the player, and the satisfaction and uplifting feeling of the player for the fact that the emphasis staging is actually performed can be enhanced. At that time, by starting the staging operation of the movable accessory 24 after the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) is started, the accessory lamp emits light (or). (Change from white light emission to blue light emission) → Operation of movable accessory 24 → Display of emphasis effect, so that each effect can be advanced at a good tempo. On the contrary, the light emission display (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission) of the accessory lamp may be started after the staging operation of the movable accessory 24 is started. Even in that case, each effect can be advanced at a good tempo, such as the operation of the movable accessory 24 → the emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from the white emission to the blue emission) → the display of the emphasis effect. It should be noted that what is executed prior to the emphasis effect may be either the operation of the movable accessory 24 or the emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission). Other than that, it may be executed almost at the same time as the emphasis effect. The frame lamp 10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts / ends the light emission display in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing, or emits white light in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing. It may be configured to start / end the change from to blue emission).

Further, after the execution of the emphasis effect is started, the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) may be started. According to this configuration, the emphasis effect is suddenly started before the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) are performed, so that the player It is possible to give surprise and surprise to the player, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the emphasis effect from being noticed by the player first. It should be noted that what is executed after the emphasis effect may be either the operation of the movable accessory 24 or the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission), which may be the same. Other than that, it may be executed almost at the same time as the emphasis effect. The frame lamp 10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts / ends the light emission display in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing, or emits white light in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing. It may be configured to start / end the change from to blue emission).

Similarly, even if the effect of the movable accessory 24 and the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) are completed, the execution of the emphasis effect may be terminated. good. It should be noted that what is terminated before the emphasis effect may be either the operation of the movable accessory 24 or the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Other than that, it may be finished almost at the same time as the emphasis effect. According to this configuration, immediately after the emphasis effect is completed (without waiting for the end of the operation of the movable accessory 24 and the end of the light emission of the accessory lamp), it is possible to move to the next effect development, and the game can be played. It will be possible to proceed at a good tempo. Further, after the execution of the emphasis effect is completed, the effect operation of the movable accessory 24 and the emission display of the accessory lamp (or the change from white emission to blue emission) may be terminated. It should be noted that what is terminated after the emphasis effect may be either the operation of the movable accessory 24 or the light emission of the accessory lamp (or the change from white light emission to blue light emission). Other than that, it may be finished almost at the same time as the emphasis production. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the emphasis effect from being delayed more than necessary, and it is possible to obtain a sharp effect by shifting the execution timing (end timing) of each. The frame lamp 10 also has the same configuration as the accessory lamp (that is, it starts / ends the light emission display in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing, or emits white light in the same manner as the accessory lamp at each timing. It may be configured to start / end the change from to blue emission).

Further, during the big hit game, the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 have a light emitting mode according to the progress of the big hit game. Specifically, in the jackpot production that progresses during the jackpot game, a moving image indicating that the jackpot is in progress (a moving image in which a character is introduced or a moving image in which characters fight each other) is played, and with lyrics or It is a production in which a song without lyrics is played. Depending on the progress of the big hit production, the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 have a light emitting mode such as white lighting → white blinking → yellow lighting → yellow blinking → white lighting → ... in chronological order. It is configured to change and loop. In this way, the predetermined light emission mode is changed according to the progress of the big hit medium effect, but as a further modification, the emphasis effect is executed to achieve the predetermined light emission mode. The light emission may be interrupted and the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 may be configured to change to blue emission. In such a configuration, the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 emit blue light with the end of the emphasis effect. May be configured to return to light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, the emphasis effect is executed while the light emission mode of the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 is lit in yellow. In that case, this yellow lighting is forcibly terminated and becomes blue emission, and when the enhancement effect is completed, the blue emission is terminated and the yellow lighting is restored, or the time during which the blue emission has been performed elapses. By straddling the switching timing of the light emission mode, it returns to blinking yellow instead of lighting yellow). In addition, the start timing of the blue light emission of the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 in such a configuration may be substantially the same as the execution start timing of the emphasis effect, may be later, may be earlier, and may be a movable combination. It may be substantially simultaneous with the operation start timing of the object 24, may be later, or may be earlier. Further, the end timing of the blue light emission of the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10 in such a configuration may be substantially the same as the execution end timing of the emphasis effect, may be later, may be earlier, and may be a movable combination. It may be substantially simultaneous with the operation end timing of the object 24, may be later, or may be earlier (supplement that the above-mentioned effect applied differs depending on which timing is used).

Further, many lamps are provided in addition to the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10. As a part of this, for example, the start port lamp attached to the first start port 51 (usually turned on or off in white, but the hold caused by winning the first start port 51 is expected to be a big hit. When the hold is high, the lamp that lights up in any of the light emission modes of blue → green → red → rainbow in the order of jackpot expectation) and the effect button lamp attached to the effect button (white if the operation is not valid) A lamp that lights up or turns off, but lights up in blue when the operation is valid. The start port lamp and the effect button lamp also emit white light (lights white) during the big hit game (during the big hit effect), but unlike the accessory lamp and the frame lamp 10, even if the emphasis effect is executed. , It is configured to maintain white light emission (white lighting) so as not to cause the player to misunderstand that the first starting port 51 has won a prize or to misunderstand that the operation is valid. In addition, in any of the accessory lamp, the frame lamp 10, the start port lamp, and the effect button lamp, if an error occurs in the game machine, regardless of the light emission mode up to that point (for executing the emphasis effect). (Even if it is a corresponding light emission mode or a light emission mode corresponding to a big hit medium effect), as an error light emission mode, it is configured to always display lighting or blinking in a specific light emission color such as red.

≪Relationship between fluctuating medium-sized character production and big hit medium-sized character production≫
In the present embodiment, as various character effects, in addition to the character effect (also referred to as "first character effect") in which the above-mentioned specific movable character (movable character 24) emits a predetermined motion and emits light. Also, a character effect (also referred to as “second character effect”) in which a predetermined movable character (movable character other than the movable character 24) performs a predetermined operation and emits light is prepared. Although detailed illustration of this predetermined movable accessory is omitted, for example, a door accessory (left and right door members) provided at the central opening of the center decoration 21 is exemplified. The door accessory (left and right door members) is configured to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction between the initial position (open position) and the movable position (closed position) in front of the screen of the staging display device 70. When the door accessory (left and right door members) is in the initial position (open position), the door accessory (left and right door members) is hidden behind the game board 20 and the screen of the effect display device 70 (the screen of the effect display device 70). Almost the entire display area) becomes visible. On the other hand, when the door accessory (left and right door members) is in the movable position (closed position), the door accessory (left and right door members) overlaps the front of the screen of the staging display device 70 (the left and right door members are adjacent to each other). The screen (display area) of the staging display device 70 is invisible or only a part of the display area is visible (at least the visible display area is smaller than the state in the initial position). ). As for the door accessory (left and right door members), as with the movable accessory (logo accessory) 24 described above, the accessory lamp (light emitter) for causing the door member (left and right door members) to emit light. ) Is provided. In the present embodiment, the second character effect can be executed not only during the execution of the jackpot game (during the display of the highlighted image) but also during the variable display of the symbol. That is, the second character effect is roughly divided into a variable medium character effect performed during the execution of the variable display of the symbol and a large hit medium character effect performed during the execution of the big hit game. In the following description, the variable middle character effect means a character effect in which a predetermined movable character (door character) emits a predetermined motion and emits light while the variable display of the symbol is being executed, and the jackpot medium character effect. The effect means a character effect in which a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) makes a predetermined action and emits light during the execution of the jackpot game. Further, the light emission of the character lamp in the variable character effect means that the character lamp of the predetermined movable character (door character) emits light during the execution of the variable display of the symbol, and the jackpot medium character The light emission of the accessory lamp in the production means that the accessory lamp of a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) emits light during the execution of the big hit game.

The fluctuating character effect suggests that, for example, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the N reach develops from the N reach to the SP reach before the SP reach develops (after the reach is established to before the SP reach develops) (for example, during the N reach). (It is configured to confirm that it will develop into SP reach by executing the variable middle-aged character production), or the scene of the winning branch after SP reach development (contents that the final result of SP reach shows a big hit) The jackpot winning is notified by notifying the jackpot winning (for example, the jackpot is confirmed by executing the variable middle-aged character production at the end of the SP reach), and the jackpot is confirmed at the end of the SP reach. It is performed when (it is configured so that the possibility of deviation is extremely high if the variable character effect is not executed). On the other hand, the big hit middle character production is, for example, when the ally character makes a first strike in the battle production with the enemy character (probability change promotion fanning production) during the execution of the big hit game at the time of the first hit, that is, the probability change promotion. The number of temporary rounds notified when the probabilistic promotion effect is executed or when a big hit occurs (when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is the number of false rounds, and the true number of rounds (the number of temporary rounds) during the execution of the big hit game. It is also performed when the round is promoted by notifying (more times than), that is, when the round promotion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the number of executions of the variable middle character effect executed during one variable display and the number of executions of the big hit medium character effect executed during one big hit game can be different. Has been done. In detail, the variable intermediate character effect may occur only once or multiple times during the execution of the variable display (naturally, it may not occur even once). Explaining the case where it occurs only once, in the above example, the first variable intermediate character effect suggesting that the variable display develops into SP reach is performed before the SP reach develops, and then the variable is performed. An example is a case where the second variable intermediate character effect is not executed because the deviation is confirmed on the display. Further, the case where the occurrence occurs multiple times is explained in the above example. An example is the case where a second variable middle-aged character production is performed to notify the big hit winning in the scene of the winning branch after the development of SP reach. It should be noted that the variable intermediate character effect may be performed three or more times during the execution of the variable display.

On the other hand, the big hit middle bonus effect does not occur a plurality of times during the execution of the big hit game, and always occurs only once (naturally, it may not occur even once). That is, to explain with the above example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot middle character effect performed at the time of probabilistic promotion (during the probable change promotion effect) and the round promotion (during the execution of the round promotion effect) are performed. Only one of the big hit medium-sized characters can be produced. Here, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game, during the execution of the probabilistic promotion effect, the emphasis effect and the character effect (first character effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs are not executed, and also. During the execution of the round promotion effect, the emphasis effect and the character effect (first character effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs are not executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the jackpot game, after the execution of the probabilistic promotion effect is completed or before the execution of the probabilistic promotion effect is started, it is performed when the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect occur during the same jackpot game. It is configured so that the character effect (first character effect) can be executed. Similarly, during the execution of the jackpot game, after the execution of the round promotion effect is completed or before the execution of the round promotion effect is started, when the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect occur during the same jackpot game, the line is performed. It is configured to be feasible to perform the character production (first character production). In any case, it is preferable that the promotion effect (probability change promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the emphasis effect and the character effect (first character effect) performed when the emphasis effect occurs are not executed in duplicate (. Including the case where the entire execution period of both effects overlaps and the case where a part of the execution periods of both effects do not overlap). As a modification of this embodiment, the promotion effect (probability change promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the emphasis effect are executed in duplicate, but the promotion effect (probability change promotion effect or round promotion effect) and the emphasis effect occur. It is configured so that it does not overlap with the character effect (first character effect) that is sometimes performed (including the case where the entire execution period of both effects overlaps and the case where part of the execution periods of both effects do not overlap). May be done. Further, as a further modification example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the character effect performed when the emphasis effect occurs (first character effect), the character effect performed at the time of probable change promotion (second character effect), and It may be configured so that only one of the character effects (second character effects) performed at the time of round promotion is performed. That is, the emphasis effect, the probabilistic promotion effect, and the round promotion effect are configured not to be executed at the same time during one big hit game. In other words, the emphasis effect may not be executed in the jackpot game in which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed, and the emphasis effect may not be executed in the jackpot game in which the round promotion effect is executed. As for the probabilistic promotion effect and the round promotion effect, only one of them may be installed. In addition, a general production that pretends to be a low-profit jackpot game and finally informs that it is actually a high-profit jackpot game, such as a probabilistic promotion production and a round promotion production, is referred to as a "promotion production". Further, as a further modification example, during the execution of the jackpot game, during the execution of the above-mentioned hold ream suggestion effect (reserved inner consecutive villa effect), the emphasis effect and the character effect (first role) performed when the emphasis effect occurs. While it is configured so that the object effect) is not executed, the execution of the hold consecutive suggestion effect (holding inner consecutive villa effect) is completed, or the execution of the pending consecutive suggestion effect (held inner consecutive villa effect) is started. Before, the character effect (first character effect) performed when the emphasis effect and the emphasis effect occur during the same jackpot game may be configured to be feasible. That is, it is preferable that during the execution of the jackpot game, the hold continuous suggestion effect (holding in-house consecutive villa effect) and the emphasis effect and the character effect performed when the emphasis effect occurs (first character effect) are not duplicated. (Including the case where the entire execution periods of both effects overlap and the case where some of the execution periods of both effects do not overlap). In such a configuration, the hold-ream suggestion effect (hold-in-ream villa effect) and the emphasis effect are executed in duplicate, but are performed when the hold-ream suggestion effect (hold-in-ream villa effect) and the emphasis effect occur. Even if it is configured so that the character effect (first character effect) is not executed in duplicate (including the case where the entire execution periods of both effects overlap and the case where a part of the execution periods of both effects do not overlap). good.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of executions of the variable middle character effect performed during the execution of the change display of the big hit (big hit change display) (one big hit change). (Fluctuating middle character effect that can be executed during) and the number of executions of the big hit middle character effect that is performed during the execution of the big hit game after the fluctuation display is stopped (the big hit middle character that can be executed during one big hit game) The number of times may be different from that of the object production). In this way, while the variable display is being executed, the variable intermediate character effect can be executed a plurality of times, so that the player can be surprised and surprised, and the character effect effect can be given. It is possible to raise the player's interest in the occurrence of (changing character production). If the variable middle bonus effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot variation display, and the jackpot bonus effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot game performed after the end of the jackpot variation display, the change is made. The light emission of the character lamp in the big hit middle character production is more likely to be the light emission of a specific mode (rainbow-colored light emission) than the light emission of the character lamp in the middle character production, or the character in the variable middle character production. The type of light emission of the lamp includes light emission of a mode other than the light emission of a specific mode (including blue light emission in addition to the rainbow color light emission), while the light emission of the accessory lamp in the big hit medium bonus staging is only the light emission of the specific mode. (It is preferable to have only iridescent emission). More specifically, the emission color of the character lamp in the big hit middle character effect is only rainbow color even when either the emphasis effect or the promotion effect is performed, but before the development of SP reach (after the reach is established). The emission color of the variable middle-aged character production that suggests the development from N reach to SP reach before the development of SP reach is blue, and the scene of the winning branch after the development of SP reach (the final result of SP reach shows a big hit). The emission color of the variable medium-sized character effect that notifies the jackpot winning is configured to be rainbow color in the scene of branching whether the content is content or content that indicates loss. In this embodiment, the number of times the variable middle character effect is executed during the execution of the big hit variation display and the number of times the big hit middle character effect is executed during the execution of the big hit game after the big hit variation display is stopped. Although the number of times is different from that of the above, the number of times is not limited to this, and the number of times of executing the variable middle-sized character effect performed during the execution of a certain big hit variation display and a certain big hit game (the certain). The number of times the jackpot variation display is different from the number of executions of the jackpot middle bonus effect performed during the execution of the jackpot game) performed after the jackpot fluctuation display is stopped may be different. That is, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the jackpot variation display performed with the same one jackpot as a trigger and the jackpot game, the number of executions of the variable intermediate character effect performed during the execution of one jackpot variation display. And the number of executions of the jackpot middle character effect performed during the execution of one jackpot game may be different. Further, in this embodiment, the emission color of the accessory lamp in the variable intermediate character effect performed during the execution of the large hit variation display and the large hit middle role performed during the execution of the big hit game after the jackpot variation display is stopped. It has been illustrated that the emission color of the accessory lamp in the object production can be different from that of the accessory lamp, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is used in the variable intermediate character production performed during the execution of a certain jackpot variation display. The emission color of the accessory lamp and the accessory lamp in the jackpot medium bonus effect performed during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot fluctuation display different from the certain jackpot fluctuation display is stopped). It may be possible that the emission color is different from the emission color. That is, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the jackpot variation display performed with the same one jackpot as a trigger and the jackpot game, the role in the variable intermediate character production performed during the execution of one jackpot variation display. The emission color of the object lamp and the emission color of the accessory lamp in the big hit middle accessory effect performed during the execution of one big hit game may be different from each other.

Here, the execution time of the variable medium-sized character effect and the big hit medium-sized character effect will be described. FIG. 70 (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the variable middle character effect, and FIG. 70 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the big hit middle character effect.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the variable medium accessory effect and the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the big hit medium accessory effect are configured to be different. Here, the operation times TD1 and TD2 of the door accessory basically return to the initial position and operate after the door accessory (left and right door members) starts the operation with the initial position as the starting point of the operation. It is the time to finish. Further, the operation times TD1 and TD2 include not only the movement time when the door accessory is actually moving, but also the holding time when the door accessory is stopped and held at a predetermined movable position (after movement). Position retention time) is also included. In addition, in this embodiment, this holding time (position holding time after movement) is a state in which the door accessory is integrated (the door accessory is integrated) by arranging the left and right door members adjacent to each other at the movable position. It is time to hold the completed state). In the present embodiment, the holding time of the door accessory (position holding time after movement) in the big hit medium accessory effect is longer than the holding time of the door accessory in the variable medium accessory effect (position holding time after movement). Due to the time, the respective operating times TD1 and TD2 are set to different times. That is, when the execution time TD1 of the variable middle character effect and the execution time TD2 of the big hit medium character effect are compared, the closing direction in which the door accessory (left and right door members) moves from the initial position to the movable position in the closing direction. The movement time is equal to the opening direction movement time in which the door accessory (left and right door members) moves from the movable position to the initial position in the open direction, but the door accessory (left and right door members) is predetermined. Due to the difference in the holding time held at the movable position (position holding time after movement), the operating time of the movable accessory in the big hit medium accessory effect TD2 is higher than the operating time TD1 of the movable accessory in the variable medium accessory effect. It is configured so that it takes longer. According to this configuration, when the variable middle character effect is executed during the execution of the variable display of the big hit, and the big hit character effect is executed during the execution of the big hit game performed after the end of the variable display of the big hit. That is, even if the character effect is performed multiple times between the start of the jackpot variation display and the end of the jackpot game, the operation time of the door accessory (left and right door members) is different, so that the door accessory Even if the operation order of the (left and right door members) is the same, it is possible to give a different impression to the player, and it is possible to further enrich the variation of the character production. In this embodiment, the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the variable accessory effect performed during the execution of the jackpot variation display and the jackpot game performed during the execution of the jackpot game after the jackpot variation display is stopped are in progress. It is illustrated that the operation time of the door character in the character effect is different from TD2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the door role in the variable medium character effect performed during the execution of a certain jackpot variable display is not limited to this. The operation time of the object TD1 and the operation of the door accessory in the jackpot medium bonus effect performed during the execution of a certain jackpot game (a jackpot game performed after the jackpot fluctuation display different from the certain jackpot fluctuation display is stopped). The time may be different from the time TD2. That is, regardless of whether or not there is a relationship between the jackpot fluctuation display performed with the same one jackpot as a trigger and the jackpot game, the door in the variable middle character effect performed during the execution of the one jackpot fluctuation display. The operating time TD1 of the accessory and the operating time TD2 of the door accessory in the jackpot middle bonus effect performed during the execution of one big hit game may be different times. According to this, similar to the above-mentioned effect, even if the character effect is performed using the same door character (second character effect), a different impression can be given to the player, and the character effect can be produced. The variations can be made even more abundant. In addition, regarding the operating time TD1 of the door character in the variable medium character production, the variable medium character effect suggesting that it develops from N reach to SP reach before the SP reach development (after the reach is established to before the SP reach development). Rather than the operating time, the variable middle-sized character that notifies the jackpot winning in the scene of the winning branch after the development of the SP reach (the scene of the branching whether the final result of the SP reach is the content indicating the big hit or the content indicating the loss). By configuring the staging operation time to be longer, it is possible to further enrich the variation of the character staging within one jackpot variation (within one jackpot variation display). Here, as a modification, the operating time TD1 of the door accessory in the variable medium accessory effect may be configured to be longer than the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the big hit medium accessory effect. With such a configuration, even during a jackpot game that has a limited execution period (the end of the execution period may be accelerated depending on the state of entry into the big winning opening 54), the execution period is within the execution period. The jackpot medium-sized character production can be completed as much as possible, and the variable medium-sized character production that is executed during the predetermined variable time further arouses the player's expectation by making the execution time longer. Can be done.

As a modification, when a predetermined movable accessory (door accessory) or a specific movable accessory (movable accessory 24) is held at a predetermined movable position, the movable accessory is changed to another form. It may be deformed or combined with other movable objects to form a perfect body. In addition, it fluctuates by making the closing direction moving time and the opening direction moving time of the door accessory in the variable middle role effect different from the closing direction moving time and the opening direction moving time of the door accessory in the big hit medium accessory effect. The operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the middle role effect and the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the big hit middle accessory effect may be different. Further, as described above, the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the jackpot medium accessory effect may be configured to be shorter than the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the variable medium accessory effect. However, the operation time TD1 of the door accessory in the variable middle accessory effect and the operation time TD2 of the door accessory in the big hit medium accessory effect may be configured to be the same time. Further, when the variable intermediate character effect is executed a plurality of times during the variable display of the symbol, as described above, for example, after the SP reach development, the execution time of the variable medium accessory effect performed before the SP reach development is increased. It may be configured so that the execution time of the variable medium-sized character effect (the variable medium-sized character effect that notifies the confirmation of the big hit) performed in the scene of the winning branch is longer, or conversely, the SP reach development. The execution time of the variable middle character production (variable middle character production that notifies the jackpot confirmation) that is performed in the scene of the winning branch after the SP reach development is longer than the execution time of the variable middle character production that is performed before. It may be configured for a short time. In addition, the operation pattern of the door accessory in the variable medium accessory effect (operation distance, operation order, operation speed, etc.) and the operation pattern of the door accessory in the jackpot medium accessory effect (operation distance, operation order, operation speed, etc.) May be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light emitting mode of the bonus lamp in the variable medium bonus effect and the light emitting mode of the bonus lamp in the jackpot medium bonus effect are configured to be different from each other. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), during the execution of the variable medium accessory effect (for example, the variable medium accessory effect before the development of SP reach), the accessory lamp has a predetermined emission color (blue). It emits light at. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the bonus lamp emits light in a specific emission color (rainbow color) during the execution of the jackpot medium bonus effect. By making the emission color of the accessory lamp different between the variable medium-sized character effect and the big-hit medium-sized character effect, the player's interest is attracted to the door character from the start of the variable display to the end of the big-hit game. It is possible to attract not only the movement but also the emission color of the accessory lamp, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the accessory effect. In the time chart shown in FIG. 70, the accessory lamp of the door accessory may be configured to emit white light instead of the non-light emitting state (in that case, the “non-light emitting state” in this time chart may be used. It should be added that "emission" is replaced with "white emission").

It should be noted that, in the fluctuating intermediate accessory effect at the time of the winning branch after the development of SP reach, the accessory lamp of the door accessory may be configured to emit light in a specific emission color (rainbow color). According to this, even if the variable display is performed twice during the variable display, the emission color of the bonus lamp is different, so that even if the operation of the door bonus is the same, the player can use it. On the other hand, it is possible to give a different impression, and it is possible to further enrich the variation of the character production.

≪Execution restrictions for emphasis production and over-winning production≫
Next, the execution restriction when the execution conditions of the emphasis effect and the over-winning effect are satisfied will be described. FIG. 71 (A) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the emphasis effect is performed, and FIG. 71 (B) is a time chart when the execution restriction of the over-winning effect is performed.

As described above, the emphasis effect can be executed when the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the jackpot game, and the over-winning effect is the over-winning during the execution of the jackpot game (one round game). It can be executed when the effect execution condition is satisfied, but even if the emphasized effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied, if the special effect described later is being executed or is scheduled to be executed, it can be executed. The execution of special effects and / or over-winning effects is restricted. That is, when the special effect is being executed when the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied, or when the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied, the special effect is executed. When is scheduled (when it is decided to execute by the special effect execution lottery), even if the emphasis effect execution condition and / the over-winning effect execution condition are satisfied, the emphasis effect and / or Execution of over-winning production is restricted (cancelled). The time chart in FIG. 71 shows a case where the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied or a case where the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special effect, but before the special effect is executed (non-execution of the special effect). When the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied in (middle) or when the execution start timing of the special effect arrives while the emphasis effect or over prize effect is being executed by satisfying the over-winning effect execution condition, it is being executed. It is configured to cancel the emphasis production and over-winning production in the middle. As a modification, when the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied before the special effect is executed (during the special effect is not being executed), or by satisfying the over-winning effect execution condition, the emphasis effect or the over-winning effect is executed. If the execution start timing of the special effect arrives during the execution, unlike the case where the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the special effect or the case where the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect being executed is executed. Or over winning effect may be configured to be executed to the end without stopping in the middle. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity that the emphasis production and the over-winning production end in the middle.

Here, the special effect of this embodiment is a predetermined effect that can be performed during the execution of the special game (big hit game or small hit game), and for example, the following effect is exemplified.

(1) Hold continuous suggestion effect The hold continuous suggestion effect (also referred to as the hold inner consecutive villa effect) is an effect suggesting that the hold inner consecutive villa is occurring, as described above. In addition, "Holding Uchirenso" is a special case related to the preceding operation hold ball when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding operation hold ball is a big hit. It is planned that a big hit will be made in one or more subsequent operation holding balls existing at a predetermined timing between the time when the hit / fail judgment of the symbol is permitted and the end of the big hit game executed by the big hit. It means that the operation hold ball (also called "big hit hold") is included. Here, the reason for limiting the execution of the emphasis effect and the over-winning effect when the hold-ream suggestion effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that when the emphasis effect or the over-winning effect is executed in duplicate with the hold-ream suggestion effect, This is because the notification contents of both effects are difficult for the player to recognize, and on the contrary, the effect of both effects may be reduced. In addition, for the player, the next big hit is promised rather than the cumulative number of prize balls reaching a specific value or the over-winning has occurred (there is a holding in-house consecutive villa). This is more useful information, and the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value can be grasped by checking the cumulative number of prize balls display. This is because the player who gives priority to the game will be more interested in the game.

(2) Promotional effect The promotion effect is a profit mode related to the jackpot before or at the start of the jackpot game when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the special symbol (referred to as a "provisional profit mode" for convenience). After suggesting or notifying, it is an effect of suggesting or notifying that the actual profit mode related to the jackpot has a higher profit degree than the provisional profit mode during the execution of the jackpot game. In other words, it is suggested whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and the jackpot is suggested through the series of processes. It is a production that shows whether or not the profit mode of the above is promoted (as described above, it is a production that finally informs that it is a high profit jackpot game by pretending to be a low profit jackpot game). There are two types of promotion effects: probabilistic promotion effects and round promotion effects. Since the contents of the probabilistic promotion effect and the round promotion effect are described above, duplicate explanations will be omitted. Here, the reason for limiting the execution of the emphasis effect and the over-winning effect when the promotion effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that when the emphasis effect or the over-winning effect is executed in duplicate with the promotion effect, both effects are notified. This is because the content becomes difficult for the player to recognize, and on the contrary, the effect of both effects may be reduced. In addition, for the player, the profit status of the jackpot is promoted rather than the cumulative number of prize balls reaching a specific number or the over-winning occurs (promotion to a probabilistic jackpot or the jackpot game is rounded up). That) is more useful information, and the fact that the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value can be grasped by checking the cumulative number of prize balls display. This is because the interest of the game increases when the execution is prioritized.

(3) Low-profit jackpot medium production If the jackpot production performed during the jackpot game is a so-called low-profit jackpot medium-hit production, the emphasis production execution condition and / or over during the execution of the low-profit jackpot medium production. Even if the winning effect execution condition is satisfied, this emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect is not executed. The "low profit jackpot" is, for example, the jackpot type (low round jackpot) set to the number of rounds in which the specified number of rounds is relatively small, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot of each round. Big hit type (short open big hit) set for a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), transition to normal game state (low probability low base state) or time saving game state (low probability high base state) after the end of big hit game The type of big hit (usually big hit) that triggers the game is applicable. The reason for limiting the execution of the emphasis effect and the over-winning effect when the low-profit jackpot medium effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed is that when such a low-profit jackpot is won, the emphasis effect or over is performed in the jackpot game. Even if the winning effect is executed (even if the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value or the over-winning occurs and the blessing effect is executed), the player's satisfaction and superiority are aroused. This is because it cannot be done and a sufficient effect cannot be expected. If the short open jackpot is won, the cumulative number of prize balls will not be displayed during the short round game, so the cumulative number of prize balls may reach a specific value. (Even if the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) or an over-winning occurs, the emphasis effect or over-winning effect that accompanies the cumulative prize ball number display is It is not executed.

The jackpot types are roughly divided into high-profit jackpots, which are set to have a relatively high advantage for players, and low-profit jackpots, which are set to have a relatively low advantage for players. If the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the big hit medium effect that is performed in the case of, the emphasis effect is executed, while the emphasis effect is executed during the execution of the big hit medium effect that is performed when the low profit big hit is won. When the condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect may not be executed.

(4) Big hit end demo effect In this embodiment, the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of the big hit end demo effect, and the emphasis effect is executed during the execution of the big hit end demo effect. The emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect is not executed when the condition and / or the execution condition for the over-winning effect is satisfied. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as described above, the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54 is not effectively detected within the execution time of the big hit end demo effect, and the execution of this big hit end demo effect. The emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition are not satisfied in time. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 54 during the execution of the final round game is designed so as not to be detected after the big hit end demonstration is started beyond the interval period. (That is, the entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening 54 in the final round game is always detected during the execution of the final round game or within the interval period immediately after that. (Because of the structure), the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition are not satisfied during the execution of this jackpot end demo effect, and the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect are executed in duplicate. There is no such thing. In addition, by any chance (for example, when the game ball exceeding the specified count number stays in front of the prize detection sensor inside the big prize opening 54), before the start of the big hit end demo The ball entered the big prize opening 54 (at this point, the ball was not detected because the ball entry detection sensor in the big winning opening 54 did not pass), but it passed through the ball entry detection sensor in the big winning opening 54 during the big hit end demonstration. Even if this is the case, no prize ball will be generated due to the passage, and the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition will not be satisfied during the execution of the jackpot end demo effect.

In addition, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 just before the end of the final round game (especially when the game ball exceeding the specified count number enters), the large winning opening 54 is entered. Since the entry of the game ball is designed to be effectively detected until the end of the final round game or the interval period, the emphasis effect execution condition and the emphasis effect execution condition and the time until the interval period elapses. / Or if the execution condition for the over-winning effect is satisfied, the emphasis effect and / or the execution of the over-winning effect will be started when the execution condition is satisfied. In that case, the emphasis effect may be continued even during the execution of the jackpot end demo effect beyond the final round game and the interval period, but as described above, the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis effect is Since it is set to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo effect, until the jackpot end demo effect ends (until the variable display after the jackpot game ends) The emphasis effect is completed (the over-winning effect may be configured in the same way as the emphasis effect). As a modification of the present embodiment, for example, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 just before the end of the final round game, the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied. If the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect performed by the satisfaction of the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition is not completed by the end of the interval period, the emphasis effect and / or over The winning effect is forcibly terminated when the big hit end demo effect (big hit end demo period) starts (even if the execution time of the emphasized effect and / or the over-winning effect remains at the start of the big hit end demo effect). It may be configured to end). Further, as a further modification, the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect execution time is set to be shorter than the interval time (interval period), and the emphasis is started at least by the end of the final round game. The effect and / or the over-winning effect may be configured not to be executed beyond the interval period (that is, the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect and the jackpot end demo effect may not be executed in duplicate. ).

(5) First round production in a small hit game As a modification of this embodiment, a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixed type gaming machine having both type 1 game performance and type 2 game performance (generally). When the small hit V model) is applied, it is emphasized even if the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the first round (first round effect) of the small hit game. It may be configured not to perform the effect and / or the over-winning effect.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the model called the small hit V has the first type of game playability in which the big hit game is executed by stopping and displaying the variable display result of the special symbol with the big hit symbol, and the variable display result of the special symbol. Is a second type of pachinko game in which a pachinko ball that has entered a large winning opening 54 that has been opened by displaying a stop with a small hit symbol passes through a specific area (V area) to perform a big hit game. Equipped. Therefore, if the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 54 passes through a specific area during the execution of the small hit game, the right to develop into the big hit game is granted after the end of the small hit game. There is. As a result, the first round of the small hit game is an important round game that encourages the player to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 54 and pass through a specific area (referred to as "V winning"). Become. Therefore, in the first round of this small hit game, for example, the characters "Aim for V prize!" Priority is given to the execution of the V prize-winning instruction effect, which displays a message image indicating the above and instructs the player to enter the game ball into a specific area. That is, even if the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect is satisfied in the ball entry in the first round of the small hit game, the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect is not executed. However, for the second and subsequent rounds, which are executed by passing through a specific area (V area) in the first round and becoming a big hit game, the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect can be satisfied. It is configured to perform an emphasis effect and / or an over-winning effect.

In addition, when a V prize occurs in which the game ball passes through a specific area in the first round of this small hit game, the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 generated after the V prize in the first round. (For example, if a V prize is generated when the first ball enters the large winning opening 54, the second and subsequent balls enter the large winning opening 54), a special effect (round number suggestion effect) is performed. , In this special effect, each time the game ball enters the big winning opening 54, the display mode (display color) of a specific object image is changed, and the big hit of the development destination according to the display mode (display color) after the change. It may be configured to suggest the number of rounds of the game. More specifically, in the special effect (round number suggestion effect), when a V prize is generated, the characters "Congratulations!" Are displayed, and every time the ball is entered into the large prize opening 54 after that (however, By the time the specified count is reached), the color of the characters "Congratulations!" Can change, and the color of the characters is white → blue → red → rainbow, and there is a high possibility that the number of rounds will be large. (Examples of the number of rounds are 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, etc., and if it is rainbow-colored here, the largest number of rounds is determined). Even in that case, priority is given to the execution of the special effect (round number suggestion effect) performed after the V prize, and the emphasis effect and / or over even when the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over prize effect execution condition is satisfied. It is preferable to limit the execution of the winning effect.

In the above embodiment, when the emphasis effect execution condition and / or the over-winning effect execution condition is satisfied while the special effect is being executed or is scheduled to be executed, the execution of the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect is restricted. Although it was configured to be (cancelled), in addition to this, if a special effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect, the execution of the special effect is started as an opportunity. It may be configured to forcibly end or suspend the execution of the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect. If the execution of the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect is temporarily suspended when the execution of the special effect is started, the execution of the emphasis effect and / or the over-winning effect is resumed when the execution of the special effect is completed. It is preferable to do so.

≪Power off / return while jackpot type is displayed≫
Next, a case where the power is cut off occurs while the first specific effect (display of the jackpot type) suggesting the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed is being performed during the execution of the jackpot game will be described. .. FIG. 72 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during execution of the jackpot type display.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot start demo, the jackpot type display (super-jutsu jackpot display, kotobuki jackpot display, ki jackpot) suggesting the type of jackpot that triggers the execution of the jackpot game is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. (Display) is performed, and the player is informed or notified of the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed. Specifically, the "super-jump jackpot display" is a display with the characters "super-jutsu jackpot !!!" displayed and the background is rainbow-colored during the execution of the jackpot start demo, and the "jutsu jackpot display" is a jackpot display. The text "Ki jackpot!" Is displayed and the background is red while the start demo is running, and the text "Ki jackpot" is displayed while the jackpot start demo is running. The background is a blue display. If the super-jump jackpot display is performed as the jackpot type display during the jackpot game (big hit start demo), it is suggested or notified that the jackpot game currently being executed is a 16-round game (super-jump jackpot). (It is suggested or notified that the player has won the prize), and if the jackpot type display is the Kotobuki jackpot display or the Ki jackpot display, it is suggested or notified that the jackpot game currently being executed is a 4-round jackpot game. (It is suggested or notified that you have won the Kotobuki or Ki jackpot). Then, if a power failure occurs during the execution of this big hit game (big hit start demo) and the big hit game (big hit start demo) is restarted by the recovery of the power cut, it is interrupted by the power cut. The big hit type display that had been displayed is not restored, and after the big hit game (big hit start demo) is restarted, the power off / return image (power off) showing the characters "Returning" during the big hit game (during the big hit start demo). (Return screen) is displayed. In this embodiment, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the big hit game (big hit start demo) and the power cut is restored, the big hit game (big hit start demo) is restarted, the main control is performed. The return of the display by the effect display device 70 is configured to be earlier than the return of the display by the display device 27 (the round display described later) (that is, the effect display is displayed after the power is turned off. After the display of the device 70 is restored, the display of the main control display device 27 is restored, that is, after the display of the effect display device 70 is restored, the lighting display of the round indicator lamp 77 is restored). Then, when the power off is restored and the big hit game (big hit start demo) is restarted, the big hit type display is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 when the display by the effect display device 70 is restored, and the above-mentioned power supply is used. The disconnection / recovery image (power disconnection / recovery screen) is displayed. This power-off return image is continuously displayed until the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the final round or at the end of the jackpot end demo). When the power off is restored and the jackpot game is restarted in this way, the notification of the power off / return is prioritized over the execution of the jackpot type display interrupted by the power off, so that the player is notified. It is possible to promptly notify that the power failure has been restored and the jackpot game can be resumed. Furthermore, after the power off is restored, the power off is restored to the player by giving priority to the notification of the power off and return over the execution of the round display interrupted by the power off, and the big hit game is played. It is possible to promptly notify that it is possible to resume. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). In the case of return, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and returns in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

As a modification, after the power supply is cut off during the execution of the jackpot start demo and the power supply cutoff / recovery image is displayed due to the recovery of the power supply cutoff, a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the power supply cutoff / recovery image is displayed. (5 seconds have passed since it was displayed), or when the big hit start demo ends, it returns to the normal big hit medium production (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity big hit production, longevity big hit production, ki big hit production). (That is, the normal round effect may be restored from the lapse of a predetermined time or the start of the first round). In addition, a round production screen is displayed according to the type of big hit medium production (super longevity big hit production, longevity big hit production, ki big hit production), that is, when the big hit medium production pattern is super longevity big hit production, super longevity. Big hit round screen (for example, a production screen where character introductions for 5 people are displayed on a rainbow-colored background), and in the case of a longevity big hit production, a long-term big hit round screen (for example, for 2 people on a red background) A staging screen that displays a character introduction), and a staging screen that displays a character introduction for one person on a blue background (for example, a staging screen that displays a character introduction for one person on a blue background). ing. As another modification, a power failure occurs during the execution of the jackpot start demo, and after the power failure / recovery image is displayed due to the recovery of the power failure, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the power supply is cut off). (5 seconds have passed since the return image was displayed), or when the jackpot start demo ends, the screen returns to the dedicated jackpot medium screen (round screen dedicated after the power is turned off). (That is, the normal round effect may be restored from the lapse of a predetermined time or the start of the first round). The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). In the case of return, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and returns in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

≪Return to power off during round display≫
Next, a case where the power is cut off occurs while the second specific effect (round display) suggesting the number of rounds of the currently executed round game is being performed during the execution of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 73 is a time chart when a power failure occurs during execution of the round display.

In the present embodiment, during the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, the screen of the effect display device 70 is displayed with a round display suggesting or notifying which round game the currently being executed round game is. The number of rounds of the currently executing round game is suggested or notified to the player. This round display corresponds to the display content of the round display area 730 described above, but it is not displayed during the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo even during the big hit game, and is displayed during the round game (note that it is displayed during the round game). , Although it may be displayed in the interval period, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to display the round corresponding to the certain round game in the interval period after the end of the certain round game). Further, during the execution of the jackpot game, the main control display device 27 lights and displays the round indicator lamp 77 for notifying the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game currently being executed. The lighting display of the round indicator lamp 77 is configured to be lit and displayed not only during the round game during the big hit game, but also during the big hit start demo, the big hit end demo, and the interval period. At this time, in this embodiment, when a power cut occurs during the execution of the big hit game (round game) and the big hit game (round game) is restarted by the recovery of the power cut, the main control display device. It is configured so that the return of the display by the effect display device 70 is earlier than the return of the display by 27 (after the return of the power off, after the display of the effect display device 70 is restored, the main The display of the control display device 27 is restored, that is, after the display of the effect display device 70 is restored, the lighting display of the round indicator lamp 77 is restored). Then, when the power off is restored and the big hit game (round game) is restarted, the round display is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 when the display by the effect display device 70 is restored, and the above-mentioned power off return is resumed. The image (power off / recovery screen) is displayed. This power-off return image is continuously displayed until the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the final round game or at the end of the jackpot end demo). That is, after the power is turned off, the power off is restored to the player and the big hit game can be restarted by giving priority to the notification of the power off and return over the execution of the round display interrupted by the power off. It is possible to promptly notify that the situation has occurred. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). In the case of return, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), returns to the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331", and the round indicator light 77 turns off. Will be restored.

On the other hand, on the main control display device 27, after the power off is restored, the round indicator lamp 77 is lit and displayed, and the specified number of rounds of the restarted jackpot game is displayed. Therefore, when the power cutoff is restored, the player can first confirm the power cutoff restoration image of the staging display device 70, and then confirm the round indicator lamp 77 of the main control display device 27. .. In this way, the player can be relieved by first restoring the display of the effect display device 70 and promptly notifying the player that the power is being restored. Following that, the display of the main control display device 27 is restored and the round indicator lamp 77 is lit and displayed, so that the type of jackpot game that has been interrupted due to the power failure (the specified round lit and displayed by the round indicator lamp 77). It is possible to give the player a greater sense of security by notifying that a profit of several minutes can be obtained). The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). In the case of return, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), returns to the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331", and the round indicator light 77 turns off. Will be restored.

Further, as described above, when the big hit game is restarted due to the return of the power off, the cumulative prize ball number is not displayed during the execution of the restarted big hit game, and the game ball enters the big prize opening 54. Even if the ball is hit, the cumulative prize ball number display is not updated, the count-up effect, the emphasis effect (enlarged display), etc. are not executed. Further, even if a game ball that exceeds the specified number is entered into the large winning opening 54 (over winning) during the execution of the restarted big hit game, the over winning effect is not executed. Similarly, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the restarted jackpot game, the cumulative prize ball number display is not updated, the count-up effect, or the bonus prize winning effect is not executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the power-off / return image is continuously displayed on the effect display device 70 from the time when the big hit game is restarted due to the return of the power-off until the end of the big-hit game. The display, the round display, the cumulative number of winning balls, the large winning opening winning effect (over winning effect), and the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect) are not executed. As a modification, when the jackpot game is restarted due to the return of the power off, the cumulative prize ball number display (update display) is displayed, but the emphasis effect is performed even if the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied. It may be configured so as not to be damaged. In addition, when the big hit game is restarted due to the return of the power off, the cumulative prize ball number display (update display) is displayed, but the over prize production is not performed even if the over prize production execution condition is satisfied. It may be configured as follows. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). In the case of return, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and returns in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

As a modification, after a power cut occurs during the execution of a certain round game and a power cut / return image is displayed due to the recovery of the power cut, a predetermined time elapses (for example, a power cut / return image). (5 seconds have passed since is displayed), or when the certain round game is completed, a normal big hit medium production (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity big hit production, longevity big hit production, and ki big hit production) ) May be configured (that is, when a predetermined time has elapsed, or for example, if the power is turned off and the power is turned off during the third round round game, the power is turned off and the power is turned off at the start of the fourth round game. You may try to return to the normal round production from). As described above, when the round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the big hit medium effect (super longevity big hit effect, longevity big hit effect, ki big hit effect), that is, when the big hit medium effect effect pattern is the super longevity big hit effect. Is a super long hit round screen (for example, a production screen where character introductions for 5 people are displayed on a rainbow-colored background), and in the case of a long life big hit production, a long life big hit round screen (for example, on a red background). A staging screen that displays character introductions for two people), and a staging screen that displays a character introduction for one person on a blue background (for example, a staging screen that displays a character introduction for one person on a blue background). It is configured to. In this configuration, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed instead of the cumulative number of prize balls before the power is turned off, and the game starts from "0". The cumulative prize ball counter will also be cleared to "0" to start. However, even if the game starts from "0", when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54, the cumulative prize ball number display is updated, the count-up effect, the emphasis effect (enlarged display), etc. are executed, and further restarted. If a game ball that exceeds the specified number is entered into the big winning opening 54 (over winning) during the execution of the big hit game, the over winning effect is executed, and similarly, the restarted big hit game is executed. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the cumulative prize ball number display is updated, the count-up effect is performed, and the bonus prize-winning effect is executed. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). In the case of return, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and returns in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

Further, as another modification, after a power failure occurs during the execution of the round game and a power supply disconnection / recovery image is displayed due to the recovery of the power failure, a predetermined time elapses (for example, power failure / recovery). 5 seconds have passed since the image was displayed), or when the round game ends, the screen returns to the dedicated jackpot medium screen (the dedicated round screen after the power is turned off) after the power is turned off. It may be configured (that is, if a predetermined time elapses, or for example, if the power is turned off and the power is turned off during the third round round game, the normal round effect is started from the start of the fourth round round game. (It may be possible to return), and in such a configuration, the cumulative number of prize balls is not displayed during the execution of the big hit game after the restarted round game, and the game ball enters the big prize opening 54. Even if this is done, the cumulative prize ball number display is not updated, the count-up effect, the emphasis effect (enlarged display), etc. are not executed, and the specified number to the big prize opening 54 is exceeded during the restarted big hit game. Even if a game ball is won (over winning), the over winning effect is not executed, and similarly, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the restarted jackpot game, it is cumulative. The prize ball number display is not updated, the count-up effect, and the bonus prize-winning effect are not executed. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). In the case of return, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and returns in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "331".

As described above, the main effects achieved in the third embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the third embodiment, a special effect display that applies a predetermined special effect at the time of appearance and / or disappearance of the highlighting effect display displayed when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value is performed. Since the degree of emphasis by this emphasis effect display can be dramatically improved, it becomes possible to further impress the player that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value, and the emphasis effect display. By clarifying the start and end of (that is, by clarifying the front and back of the division when the highlighting effect display during the big hit game is one division in the consecutive villa), the game in the consecutive villa is sharpened. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, the rarity of the highlighting effect display can be increased by preventing the plurality of display patterns of the highlighting effect display from being displayed in duplicate at the same time. Furthermore, by configuring the execution time of the highlighting effect display to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo, it is emphasized based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54 just before the end of the final round game. Even if the effect execution condition is satisfied and the emphasis effect display is performed, the highlight effect display will be completed within the jackpot end demo period, so the highlight effect display will end beyond the jackpot end demo period. The player misunderstands the current game situation because it is not performed over the later variation display (it is possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the jackpot game and the start of the variation display of the first rotation). It becomes possible to prevent this from happening, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, when a highly rare effect (special effect) or an important effect for the player (special effect) is executed during the execution of the jackpot game, the cumulative number of prize balls is a specific value. By limiting the execution of the emphasis effect display even if the emphasis effect execution condition is satisfied when reaching Since it is possible to prevent a person's expectation and interest from declining, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, when a highly rare effect (special effect) or an important effect for the player (special effect) is performed during the execution of the big hit game, the provisions for the large winning opening 54 are provided. Even if a game ball that exceeds the count number is entered, by limiting the execution of the over-winning effect, it is possible to ensure the execution of this high-priority special effect, and the game for the occurrence of the special effect. Since it is possible to prevent a person's expectation and interest from declining, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, when a power cut occurs during the execution of the big hit game, the return of the effect display device 70, which is the area of the player's greatest attention, is prioritized when the power cut is restored. The player is promptly notified that the jackpot game that has been interrupted due to the power failure can be resumed, and when the display of the main control display device 27 is restored, information indicating the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed. By displaying the display, the player can clearly determine the type (number of rounds acquired) of the jackpot game currently being executed, which complicates various notifications and effect displays performed when the power is turned off and on. It can be appropriately realized without any problems, and the jackpot game restarted by the return of the power supply can be smoothly advanced, and the reliability of the game machine and the fun of the game can be improved. ..

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment and / or the third embodiment described above, and hereinafter, a portion having the same configuration. The same reference numerals are given to the above, and the description thereof will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment and / or the third embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described in order. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a setting function capable of setting a winning probability of a winning / failing determination of a special symbol and a performance information display function for displaying game performance information.

<Board composition>
First, the board configuration of the gaming machine 20 according to the fourth embodiment will be briefly described. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the first embodiment), the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 is mainly a first starting port 51 arranged below the center decoration 21, general. It is possible to enter any of the winning openings 61 to 63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. The game ball that has entered each winning opening is detected by each winning opening switch and is discharged to the back surface side of the game board 20. Further, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has flowed down without entering each winning opening to the back side of the game board 20. In this embodiment, the number of game balls launched into the game area PA and used for the game, that is, the balls are entered into each winning opening or out opening 29 of the game area PA and discharged to the back surface side of the game board 10. The number of game balls (gamed balls) is counted by the gamed ball detection switch 891, which will be described later. Of the game area PAs equipped with various winning openings, a method of launching a game ball so as to cause the game ball to flow down to the left side area PA1 is called "left-handed", and the game ball flows down to the right side area PA2. The method of firing a game ball so as to cause it is called "right-handed".

<Electrical configuration of gaming machines>
Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the main control board 100 is equipped with a setting key switch 810, a RAM clear switch 820, a performance display monitor 830, and the like, which will be described in detail later. Further, the main control board 100 has a gamed ball detection switch 891 that detects game balls discharged from the game area PA, and a frame opening switch that detects whether or not the front frame 2 is open with respect to the outer frame 1. 892 and the like are electrically connected. The gamed ball detection switch 891 and the frame opening switch 892 output each detection signal to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, also in the fourth embodiment, the main control display device 27 (see FIG. 64) includes the first special symbol table device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol hold lamp 73, and the second. Various display means such as a special symbol hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, a normal symbol hold lamp 76, a round indicator lamp 77, a status indicator lamp 78, a right-handed indicator lamp 79, and an error indicator lamp Er are provided. Since the other configurations are basically the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Main functional configuration of gaming machines>
Next, various functions of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment (mainly the main control board 100 / staging control board 200) will be described. FIG. 75 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine (mainly the main control board 100 / staging control board 200) of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 76 shows the power-on transition mode control means 175 and performance information management means 176 of FIG. 75. It is a functional block diagram extracted and shown. As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the main control board 100 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a power-on transition mode control means 175 and a performance information management means 176, which are different from the first embodiment. ing.

The power-on transition mode control means 175 controls four modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, and gaming mode, which will be described later) that shift according to the selection operation performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. As shown in FIG. 76, the power-on control means 175 includes a setting change processing means 175A, a setting confirmation processing means 175B, and a RAM clear processing means 175C. The setting change processing means 175A executes the setting change processing when the setting change mode is selected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The setting confirmation processing means 175B executes the setting confirmation processing when the setting confirmation mode is selected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The RAM clear processing means 175C is RA when the RAM clear mode is selected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
Execute M clear processing. It should be noted that these setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RAM clear processing are executed by the main control side main processing (see FIG. 35) performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. On the other hand, when the gaming mode (mode that enables the gaming) is selected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the processing related to the progress of the gaming (power off) is performed by the means 110 to 190 provided on the main control board 100. (Including processing of time) is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, each of the means 110 to 190 provided on the main control board 100 processes the game mode (process related to the progress of the game (power supply) when the game mode is selected when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. It is a game mode processing means for executing))). Further, the game mode in the present embodiment is a state in which a series of games such as a special symbol / normal symbol hit / fail determination process, a variation display process, and a special game execution process can be progressed (a state in which the game can be executed). ) Means. Therefore, at least the processing performed after the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 37) is started is included in the processing in the game mode. The contents of the transition mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode) when the power is turned on will be described later.

The performance information management means 176 executes a process related to measurement and display of the game performance information as a process for managing the game performance information. As shown in FIG. 76, the performance information management means 176 includes a performance information measurement control means 176A and a performance information display control means 176B. The performance information measurement control means 176A executes a process of measuring the performance information of the game. The performance information display control means 176B executes a process of displaying the performance information of the game. The process of measuring the performance information of the game and the process of displaying it are repeatedly executed every predetermined interrupt cycle (4 ms) in the timer interrupt process on the main control side (see FIG. 37). However, a part of the process of measuring and displaying the performance information of the game may be executed by the main process on the main control side (see FIG. 35) performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The contents related to the measurement and display of the performance information of the game will be described later.

Next, the main control board unit 100U of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a front view showing the main control board unit 100U of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 77 is a schematic view showing the performance display monitor 830 mounted on the main control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 77, the main control board unit 100U includes a main control board 100 and a main control board case 100A for accommodating the main control board 100.

The main control board case 100A includes a bottom case 100B that covers the solder surface side of the main control board 100, and a top case 100C that covers the component mounting surface side of the main control board 100 such as electronic and electrical components. A so-called caulking mechanism 100D is provided at the end of the case where the top case 100C is attached to the bottom case 100B and the top case 100C is front-to-back aligned in the closed state. Both the bottom case 100B and the top case 100C are formed by a molding means such as injection molding using a colorless and transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate or the like), and the inside of the main control board case 100A (main control board 100) can be seen from the outside. It is configured to be visible.

The main control board 100 is configured with a rectangular printed wiring board as a board, and on the component mounting surface side thereof, a main control microcomputer 110 (see FIG. 74), a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN5, a setting key switch 810, and a RAM clear. It is equipped with a switch 820, a performance display monitor 830, and the like. The main control board 100 is screwed and fixed to the inner surface side of the main control board case 100A (top case 100B) using a plurality of screws.

The setting key switch 810 is a key switch mechanism that can switch between an ON state and an OFF state by rotating a setting change key (a dedicated key managed by a game clerk or the like) inserted in the keyhole.

As described in the first embodiment and the like, the RAM clear switch 820 is an operation button operated when the RAM is cleared when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The RAM clear switch 820 is an operation switch capable of a pressing operation, and is turned on when operated and turned off when not operated. Although the details of the RAM clear switch 820 will be described later, the setting value of the jackpot winning probability (probability of winning the jackpot in the winning / failing determination of the special symbol) can be set (changeable) in cooperation with the setting key switch. It also serves as a setting change switch. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 820 is mounted on the main control board 100, but the RAM clear switch 820 may be mounted on the power supply board 500 as in the first embodiment described above.

The setting key switch 810 and the RAM clear switch 820 are covered with a small door 100E provided on the top case 100C so as to be swingable. By swinging the small door 100E upward, the setting key switch is switched. The 810 and the RAM clear switch 820 can be exposed (that is, they can be operated).

As shown in FIG. 78, the performance display monitor 830 includes four-digit display units 831 to 834. Specifically, the performance display monitor 830 includes a first display unit 831, a second display unit 832, a third display unit 833, and a fourth display unit 834 in order from left to right. The display units 831 to 834 of each digit are composed of seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 arranged in a figure eight shape and one LED segment SG8 formed in a dot point shape. As described above, the display units 831 to 834 of each digit are configured to have eight LED segments SG1 to SG8, respectively. Therefore, the display units 501 to 504 of each digit can display information such as numbers, characters, and symbols from 0 to 9 by selectively lighting the eight LED segments SG1 to SG8. .. In the following, in order to distinguish each LED segment SG1 to SG8, the seven LED segments SG1 to SG7 constituting the so-called 7-segment are also referred to as "7-segment SG1 to SG7", and one dot point is configured. The LED segment SG8 is also referred to as "dot segment SG8". In this embodiment, the four display units 831 to 834 are dynamically lit for each interrupt (every 4 ms), and the first display unit 831 → the second display unit 832 → the third display unit 833 → the fourth display unit 834 →. The lighting target is sequentially switched such as the first display unit 831 → ..., and all four display areas 831 to 834 emit light (continuous lighting) to the human naked eye by utilizing the afterimage phenomenon. Can be made to look like. In addition, each LED segment may be referred to as an LED lamp, or may be simply referred to as a lamp.

Although the details will be described later, the upper two-digit display units 831, 832 of the performance display monitor 830 display an identifier (identification symbol) for identifying the performance information of the game, the type of error, and the like (identification display unit). Identification segment) 830a is configured. Further, the lower two digits of the performance display monitor 830, the display units 833 and 834, constitute a ratio display unit (ratio segment) 830b that displays a numerical value (base value) indicating the performance information of the game. Further, in this embodiment, the set value of the jackpot probability (in this embodiment, the set value in six stages from "1" to "6") is displayed on the fourth display unit 834. As described above, various information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 can be visually recognized from the outside through the transparent main control board case 100A. As a modification of the present embodiment, instead of displaying the set value of the jackpot probability on the performance information display monitor 830, a dedicated display device for displaying the set value may be provided.

Next, the basic gaming specifications of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing basic gaming specifications of the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

<Set value>
First, the set value of the jackpot probability will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In this embodiment, the winning probability (big hit probability) in which the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit is determined by the set value of 6 steps. In this embodiment, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" are provided as setting values in six stages. In the following, when the setting value is 1, "setting value 1", when the setting value is 2, "setting value 2", when the setting value is 3, "setting value 3", and the setting value is 4. A certain case is also referred to as "set value 4", a case where the set value is 5, is also referred to as "set value 5", and a case where the set value is 6 is also referred to as "set value 6". As a modification of this embodiment, only one type of set value for determining the winning probability (big hit probability) in which the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol becomes a big hit may be set (that is, one set value (set value). A one-stage setting gaming machine having only 1) may be adopted). As a result, in this one-step setting gaming machine, only "1" is displayed as the current setting value in the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value is not changed from "1" in the setting change mode (for example, the setting value). Even if the operation to change is performed, the set value is not changed from "1" to another value such as "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → ...) By performing this, it becomes possible to design a gaming machine having a software configuration and a hardware configuration substantially equivalent to those of a gaming machine equipped with a setting change function (a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values).

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability for each set value increases by one step in the order of set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4 <set value 5 <set value 6. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state, the jackpot probability when the set value is 1 is "1/320", the jackpot probability when the set value is 2, is "1/301", and the set value is 3. The jackpot probability at a certain time is "1/280", the jackpot probability when the set value is 4, is "1/260", the jackpot probability when the set value is 5, is "1/240", and when the set value is 6. The jackpot probability of is "1/220". When the gaming state is a high probability state, the jackpot probability when the set value is 1 is "1/102", the jackpot probability when the set value is 2, is "1/95", and the set value is 3. The jackpot probability is "1/89", the jackpot probability when the set value is 4 is "1/82", the jackpot probability when the set value is 5, is "1/76", and the jackpot probability when the set value is 6. The probability is "1/70". In each set value 1 to 6, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to be the same ratio (in this embodiment, the low probability). The denominator of the jackpot probability in the state and the denominator of the jackpot probability in the high probability state are rounded off to the first digit). That is, regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is selected, the ratio (change rate of the jackpot probability) between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the same. As described above, the set values of these six stages are displayed on the fourth display unit 834 of the performance display monitor 830.

<Judgment of correctness of special symbol>
Next, the hit / fail determination of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table of the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, a special symbol winning / failing lottery table corresponding to each set value 1 to 6 is provided, and a special symbol winning / failing lottery table corresponding to the currently set set value is selected to determine whether the special symbol is correct or not. Is supposed to be executed. Here, FIG. 80 (A) corresponds to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table corresponding to the set value 1, FIG. 80 (B) corresponds to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table corresponding to the set value 2, and FIG. 80 (C) corresponds to the set value 3. Special symbol winning / failing lottery table, FIG. 80 (D) is a special symbol winning / failing lottery table corresponding to the set value 4, FIG. 80 (E) is a special symbol winning / failing lottery table corresponding to the set value 5, and FIG. 80 (F) is set. It is a special symbol winning / failing lottery table corresponding to the value 6.

As in the first embodiment, each special symbol winning / failing lottery table is a table referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. Includes a table referenced in the playing state (high probability state). Further, in each special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. In addition, in FIG. 80, the jackpot probability is added as a reference value.

As shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the set value is 1, in the low probability state, it becomes a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 204", and in the high probability state, it becomes a special symbol. When the winning random value falls in the range of "0 to 643", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/320", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/102".

As shown in FIG. 80 (B), when the set value is 2, in the low probability state, it becomes a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 217", and in the high probability state, it becomes a special symbol. When the winning random value falls in the range of "0 to 686", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/301", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/95".

As shown in FIG. 80 (C), when the set value is 3, in the low probability state, it becomes a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 233", and in the high probability state, it becomes a big hit, and in the high probability state, it becomes a special symbol. When the winning random value falls in the range of "0 to 735", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/280", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/89".

As shown in FIG. 80 (D), when the set value is 4, a big hit is obtained when the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 251" in the low probability state, and the special symbol is obtained in the high probability state. When the winning random value falls in the range of "0 to 791", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/260", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/82".

As shown in FIG. 80 (E), when the set value is 5, in the low probability state, it becomes a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 272", and in the high probability state, it becomes a special symbol. When the winning random value falls in the range of "0 to 857", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/240", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/76".

As shown in FIG. 80 (F), when the set value is 6, in the low probability state, it becomes a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 297", and in the high probability state, it becomes a big hit, and in the high probability state, it becomes a special symbol. When the winning random value falls in the range of "0 to 935", it becomes a big hit. That is, as described above, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is "1/220", and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is "1/7".

<Big hit type>
Next, the jackpot type (breakdown of jackpots) of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the big hit type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol big hit symbol table shown in FIG. 81. As mentioned above, "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and "normal jackpot" means special after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the symbol. Details will be described later, but if a specific jackpot is won, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol will be activated after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of variation display times of the special symbol will be the specified number of STs after the end of the jackpot game. It continues until it reaches (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number of times (100 times). In addition, regardless of whether you win the "specific jackpot" or the "normal jackpot", the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function will operate after the jackpot game ends, and the calculation will start after the jackpot game ends. The variation display number of the special symbol is continued until the predetermined number of times (100 times) is reached. In this embodiment, the variable time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol start to operate at the same time and end at the same time, so that the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time" and the "number of times of electric support" are the same. It is the number of times (for that reason, in FIG. 81, the “number of times of shortening the fluctuation time” and the “number of times of electric support operation” are described in the same column).

FIG. 81A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, probability fluctuation count, fluctuation time shortening count (electric support count), and regulation round of jackpot game The number and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 of each round are associated with each other. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B) are set as two types of jackpot types (symbol group).

When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is large. The long opening time is set to "29 seconds", which is sufficiently expected to reach the specified number (specified count number: 10) of the game balls entering the winning opening 54. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "100 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100 times", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is large. The long opening time is set to "29 seconds", which is sufficiently expected to reach the specified number (specified count number: 10) of the game balls entering the winning opening 54. In addition, when the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won in the first special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuates reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the predetermined number of times (100 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

FIG. 81B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group (stop symbol), jackpot type, probability fluctuation count, fluctuation time shortening count (electric support count), and regulation round of jackpot game The number and the opening time of the big winning opening 54 of each round are associated with each other. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, 8R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) are set as two types of jackpot types (symbol group).

When the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "8 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is large. The long opening time is set to "29 seconds", which is sufficiently expected to reach the specified number (specified count number: 10) of the game balls entering the winning opening 54. In addition, when the second special symbol "8R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "100 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100 times", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is large. The long opening time is set to "29 seconds", which is sufficiently expected to reach the specified number (specified count number: 10) of the game balls entering the winning opening 54. In addition, when the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won in the second special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuates reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the predetermined number of times (100 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times), the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

Here, whether or not the variable display count of the special symbol has reached the specified ST count or the predetermined count is determined by the total number of the variable display count of the first special symbol and the variable display count of the second special symbol. Judgment is made based on whether or not the predetermined number of times has been reached. As a modification, the determination is made based on whether or not the number of times of variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the main body of the game, has reached the specified number of STs or the predetermined number of times. It may be configured in.

As shown in FIG. 79, regarding the ordinary symbol game of the fourth embodiment (probability of winning the ordinary symbol, opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522, etc.), the ordinary symbol game of the first embodiment (winning of the ordinary symbol). Since it is the same as the probability, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522, etc.), the description thereof will be omitted.

<Number of prize balls>
Subsequently, the number of prize balls of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the number of prize balls set in each winning opening (the number of unit prize balls paid out based on the winning of one game ball) is set to "4" in the first starting opening 51. The number is set to "1 piece", the second starting port 52 is set to "1 piece", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3 pieces", and the large winning opening 54 is set to "15 pieces". The number of unit prize balls is not limited to that illustrated in the fourth embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied.

<Transition mode when power is turned on>
Next, the transition mode when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation at power-on and the transition mode. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, as four transition modes that can be transitioned when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored), a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, a RAM clear mode, and a gaming mode are used. Is provided. That is, in this embodiment, by performing the predetermined operation shown in FIG. 82 at the same time as turning on the power of the gaming machine, it is possible to select the transition mode to be shifted when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 82, the operations performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on include the operation of the setting key switch 810, the operation of the RAM clear switch 820, the opening / closing operation of the front frame 2, and the operation of the power switch. Whether or not the front frame 2 is open with respect to the outer frame 1 is determined by the detection information of the above-mentioned frame opening switch 892. The frame opening switch 892 is turned on when the front frame 2 is open with respect to the outer frame 1, and is turned off when the front frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1. In this embodiment, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2). It is a condition that it is in the ON state), but when shifting to the RAM clear mode or the game mode when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is the front frame 2). It is not a condition that it is in the ON state where the open state of is detected). That is, when shifting to the RAM clear mode or the game mode when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is ON when the front frame 2 is detected to be open). Even in a certain case, even when the front frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the OFF state where the closed state of the front frame 2 is detected), a predetermined operation (described later) is performed when the power is turned on. It is possible to migrate by doing it. As a modification, even when the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the open state of the front frame 2). Is not a condition (ON state in which the front frame 2 is detected), that is, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2). However, even when the front frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 is in the OFF state when the front frame 2 is detected to be closed), a predetermined operation (described later) is performed when the power is turned on. It may be configured so that it can be migrated with. Further, the effect display device 70 is configured to display the power-off / recovery image regardless of the mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM clear mode, game mode).

In the setting change mode, the setting key switch 810 is turned ON and the RAM is set in the state where the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2). This mode shifts to the case where the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the clear switch 820 turned on. When shifting to this setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the current setting that was first set in the fourth display unit 834 of the performance display monitor 830 before the power was turned on (when the power was turned off most recently). The value is displayed. In other words, when shifting to the setting change mode, the current setting value (setting value already set before shifting to the setting change mode) can be confirmed first. As a modification, a predetermined setting value (for example, "1") may be always displayed regardless of the setting value already set before the transition to the setting change mode. Further, while the setting change mode is being executed, the set value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 820. Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed, the setting value is displayed as "1"->"2"->"3"->"4"->"5"->"6"->"1"->. It switches in the order of ... At this time, if the setting key switch 810 is switched to OFF while the desired setting value is displayed, the setting value (desired setting value) is confirmed and the setting change mode ends. Then, when this setting change mode ends, the game mode shifts to a game mode in which the game is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information. When the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information when the setting change mode ends, all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time. Initial display (full blinking display) is performed (details will be described later). As a modification, the setting key switch 810 is turned ON and the setting key switch 810 is turned ON in a state where the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2). In addition to the case where the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the RAM clear switch 820 turned on, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is the front frame). Even if the power is turned on (turning on the power switch) with the setting key switch 810 turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 turned on in the ON state where the open state of 2 is detected), after that. During the restoration of the display of the effect display device 70 (particularly, for 1 second after the display is restored), specifically, while the power-off / recovery image (power-off / recovery screen) is being displayed (particularly). Even if the setting key switch 810 is switched from OFF to ON in the first 1 second of the 3 seconds in which the power-off recovery image is displayed, the setting change mode may be configured. With such a configuration, even if the operation to shift to the RAM clear mode is mistakenly performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. .. Even in this configuration, the front frame 2 is open to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is in the ON state when the front frame 2 is detected to be open), as described above. It is not a condition, that is, even if the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the front frame with respect to the outer frame 1 Even when the 2 is closed (the frame opening switch 892 is in the OFF state where the front frame 2 is detected to be closed), the transition may be possible by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

In the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch 810 is turned ON in the state where the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), and the RAM is set. This mode shifts to the case where the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the clear switch 820 turned off. When the mode shifts to this setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the current setting values set before the power is turned on (when the power is turned off) are dots on the fourth display unit 834 of the performance display monitor 830. It is displayed with. As a result, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the current setting value can be confirmed. The reason why the set value is displayed with dots in this setting confirmation mode is to distinguish it from the display of the set value (display without dots) when the mode shifts to the above-mentioned setting change mode. Then, when the setting key switch 810 is switched to OFF, the setting confirmation mode ends. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the game mode shifts to a game mode in which the game is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information. When the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information when the setting confirmation mode ends, all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time. Initial display (full blinking display) is performed (details will be described later). As a modification, the setting key switch 810 is turned ON and the setting key switch 810 is turned ON in a state where the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2). In addition to the case where the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the RAM clear switch 820 turned off, the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is the front frame). Even if the power is turned on (turning on the power switch) with the setting key switch 810 turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 turned off in the ON state where the open state of 2 is detected), after that. During the restoration of the display of the effect display device 70 (particularly, for 1 second after the display is restored), specifically, while the power-off / recovery image (power-off / recovery screen) is being displayed (particularly). Even if the setting key switch 810 is switched from OFF to ON in the first 1 second of the 3 seconds in which the power-off recovery image is displayed, the setting confirmation mode may be set. With such a configuration, even if an operation for shifting to the game mode is mistakenly performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode by changing the state of the setting key after the power is turned on. Even in this configuration, the front frame 2 is open to the outer frame 1 (the frame open switch 892 is in the ON state when the front frame 2 is detected to be open), as described above. It is not a condition, that is, even if the front frame 2 is opened with respect to the outer frame 1 (ON state in which the frame opening switch 892 detects the open state of the front frame 2), the front frame with respect to the outer frame 1 Even when the 2 is closed (the frame opening switch 892 is in the OFF state where the front frame 2 is detected to be closed), the transition may be possible by performing a predetermined operation (described later) when the power is turned on.

The RAM clear mode is a mode in which the setting key switch 810 is turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed (turned on) and the power is turned on (power switch is turned on). Is. When the mode shifts to this RAM clear mode, a predetermined storage area of the RAM 103 mounted on the main control microcomputer 110 is initialized (so-called RAM clear processing is performed). This RAM clear mode automatically ends after the RAM clear process is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, the game mode shifts to a game mode in which the game is possible, and the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information. When the information displayed on the performance display monitor 830 is switched from the set value information to the performance information when the RAM clear mode ends, all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time. Initial display (full blinking display) is performed (details will be described later).

The game mode is a mode for shifting to the case where the power is turned on (when the power switch is turned on) with the setting key switch 810 turned off and the RAM clear switch 820 turned off. This game mode is shifted after the backup data saved in the RAM 103 is restored when the power is cut off immediately before. In addition, when shifting to the game mode after the setting change mode, the transition is made after the setting change is completed and the backup data saved in the RAM 103 is erased, and when shifting to the game mode after the setting confirmation mode, the setting is made. When the confirmation is completed and the backup data saved in the RAM 103 is restored and then transferred, and when the mode is shifted to the game mode after the RAM clear mode, the backup data saved in the RAM 103 is erased and then migrated. When the game mode is entered, the game becomes possible, and the initial display (all blinking display) in which all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 blink for a predetermined time is performed (details will be described later).

≪Processing in setting change mode≫
Next, the processing in the setting change mode at the time of turning on the power will be described.

(Notification content while changing settings)
First, the contents of notification in the performance display monitor 830, the main control display device 27, the external information terminal board 600, the speaker 11, the frame lamp 10, and the staging display device 70 when the transition mode at the time of turning on the power is the setting change mode will be described. do. FIG. 84 (A) is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting change mode.

When the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the set value of the jackpot probability is displayed on the fourth display unit 834 of the performance display monitor 830. As described above, during the execution of this setting change mode, each time the RAM clear switch 820 is pressed, the setting value is displayed as "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5". → "6" → "1" → ... In this setting change mode, a numerical value indicating the set value (for example, when the set value is "1", the numerical value "1") is lit and displayed on the 7 segments SG1 to SG7 of the fourth display unit 834. , Dots are not lit and displayed on the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display unit 834 (the dot segment SG8 is turned off).

Further, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode, the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device 27 is lit and displayed. The lighting display of the error indicator lamp Er is continuously performed from the start to the end of the setting change mode. The other indicator lights 71 to 79 of the main control display device 27 are turned off from the start to the end of the setting change mode. As a modification thereof, all the other indicator lights 71 to 79 or some of the indicator lights may be turned on or blinked. In that case, it is preferable to display a plurality of LED segments constituting each indicator lamp in full lighting display or full blinking display. As another modification, all the indicator lights of the main control display device 27 may be turned off, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device 27.

Further, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board 600 to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine. The output of this security signal is started from the start of the setting change mode, and the output is stopped after a predetermined time (128 ms) has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Further, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the voice "The setting value is being changed" is output from the speaker 11. This "setting value is being changed" voice is repeatedly output from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

Further, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting changing image indicating the characters "setting changing" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. The display of the image during the setting change is continuously performed from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

(Prize ball payout while changing settings)
Next, the prize ball payout when the transition mode at the time of turning on the power is the setting change mode will be described. First, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the payout of all prize balls is restricted until the setting change mode ends, and the prize balls are not paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34. That is, while the setting change mode is being executed, the payout of prize balls based on the entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the large winning opening 54 and the general winning opening 64 is restricted. In the present embodiment, the payout of prize balls is permitted when the setting change mode ends and the game mode starts. When the setting change mode ends, the RAM clear mode may be started instead of the game mode (the game mode may be started when the RAM clear mode ends).

Here, a process will be described when a power cut occurs during the payout of the prize ball and the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power cut is restored. Specifically, when the power is cut off while the prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit 34, the information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out is backed up in the storage area of the RAM 103. The power is cut off in this state. Here, when the normal power-on operation (the operation of turning on the power without turning on the RAM clear switch 820) is performed when the power is turned off, the information on the number of prize balls for the unpaid amount is stored in the storage area of the RAM 103. Is remembered, the number of prize balls for the unpaid amount will be paid out after the power is restored. On the other hand, when the operation to shift to the setting change mode (the operation of turning on the setting key switch 810 and turning on the RAM clear switch 820 to turn on the power) is performed when the power is restored, the storage area of the RAM 103 is stored. Since the stored game information is erased, the information on the number of unpaid prize balls that was backed up when the power was turned off is also erased so that the unpaid prize balls will not be paid out when the power is turned off. Become. The information on the number of unpaid prize balls backed up when the power is turned off is not deleted when the setting change mode starts, but is deleted when the setting change mode ends.

Further, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if the game ball enters one of the winning openings between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the setting changing mode ends (for example, the general winning opening 64). I / O of the main control board 100 by forcing a game ball into the ball, forcibly opening the large winning opening 54 to enter a game ball, or forcibly turning on each winning opening switch. Even if an input signal is input to the input port of the / O port circuit 104), if the setting change mode is not terminated and the game mode is not entered (main control side timer interrupt processing is activated and input processing (S53)). , Prize monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc.), because the main CPU 101 does not access the input port of the I / O port circuit 104, game balls can be used in various winning openings. The information that the ball has been entered is not stored in the storage area of the RAM 103, and the prize ball is not paid out during the execution of this setting change mode.

(Other processing while changing settings)
Next, other processing when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on will be described. Even if the firing handle 12 is touched and the rotation operation is performed during the setting change mode, the operation of the firing handle 12 is determined to be invalid, or the touching the firing handle 12 and the rotation operation are not detected. (Structured to limit launch detection). That is, even if the launch handle 12 is touched and the rotation operation is performed, the game ball cannot be launched. With this configuration, the firing handle 12 may be accidentally touched during the setting change mode and the rotation operation may be performed, so that an unexpected launch of a game ball (use of a game ball) or an unexpected entry of a ball can be performed. It is possible to prevent it in advance. Further, even if the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer during the setting change mode, the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the misidentification that the setting change mode has ended even though the setting change mode is in progress. In addition, it is configured not to start the variable display of the special symbol during the setting change mode (does not satisfy the special symbol variation start condition), and does not start the variable display of the normal symbol during the setting change mode (normal symbol). It is configured so that the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied). With this configuration, even if there is an unexpected entry of a ball (such as the entry of a game ball staying in the game area PA) during the setting change mode, an unintended hit / fail judgment and a variation display based on the judgment are performed. By not having it, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting change mode or the game mode. Further, even in the setting change mode, it is possible to detect a specific error (for example, a door / frame opening error or a magnetic sensor error), but it is configured not to display an error notification related to the specific error. At the same time, it is configured so that it is possible to detect and notify an error about a predetermined error (for example, a setting value abnormality error or a setting change abnormality error described later). With this configuration, unlike the game mode, the setting change is performed by limiting the error notification for a specific error and giving priority to the notification of a predetermined error (error related to the setting) during the setting change mode. It is possible to set the error notification mode suitable for the mode, and unlike the specifications that limit the firing detection, the display of the standby demo screen, and the variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols during the setting change mode, about the detection of a specific error. Does not limit, so the player himself can properly grasp the current situation.

As a modification of the transition to the setting change mode, the rotation operation by touching the launch handle 12 may be enabled during the setting change mode (the game is performed by touching the launch handle 12 to perform the rotation operation). It is possible to launch a ball). Further, the standby demo screen (customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer during the setting change mode. Further, when an error is detected during the setting change mode, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image is set in the layer higher or lower than the layer of the image "setting value is being changed" above.

(Processing when returning from changing settings)
Next, the processing when the setting change mode is returned to the game mode will be described. Even if you continue to hold the firing handle 12 (touch the hand and rotate it) until the game mode (a specific time elapses from the start of the game mode) that shifts from the setting change mode to the end of the setting change mode. Even if you keep doing it, or if you keep touching it, the touch effect will not be executed (touch operation will be invalid). The touch effect means that the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12) while the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is in progress. It is an effect that is executed under the conditions. Specifically, during the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect), the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12). As a result, a voice output of "Game start!" Is output, and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device 70. When returning from the setting change mode to the game mode, the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is achieved by the state in which the game is not performed immediately after the return or after the return (the game is interrupted) for a predetermined time or longer. It is configured to migrate to. That is, even if the launch handle 12 is continuously held until the game mode (standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) executed after the game mode starts), which shifts from the setting change mode to the end of the setting change mode. (Even if you keep touching and rotating, or even if you keep touching), the touch effect is not executed during the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect). There is. In addition, even if the volume button (left key or right key) is pressed and operated continuously from the setting change mode to the game mode that shifts after the setting change mode ends, the volume level does not change during the game mode (volume operation is performed). It is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, it is configured so that the volume level does not change (the volume operation becomes invalid) even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode. Since the volume adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration is not premised on the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode. When the game mode is restored, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the amount of light set before the setting change mode is changed (before the power is turned off). Of the light intensity levels of, it is always set to "3"). In addition, even if the light amount button (up key or down key) is continuously pressed and operated from the setting change mode to the game mode that shifts after the setting change mode ends, the light amount level does not change during the game mode (light amount operation is performed). It is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, it is configured so that the light amount level does not change (the light amount operation becomes invalid) even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode. Since the light amount adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration is not premised on the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode. When the game mode is restored, the light intensity level is set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light intensity set before the setting change mode is changed (before the power is turned off). Of the light intensity levels of, it is always set to "3").

Further, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the error notification (abnormality notification) having a low priority may not be executed, while the error notification (abnormality notification) having a high priority may be executed. .. When the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on in this way, it is possible to prevent the processing in the setting change mode from being hindered by ignoring the error with a low priority, and the processing load due to the error notification is increased. It can be prevented from increasing. Here, the high-priority error is an error type (type 1 error) in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a high level. This type 1 error includes a magnetic sensor error, a radio wave sensor error, a disconnection short circuit power supply error, an excessive winning error, a door / frame opening error, a setting value abnormality error, a setting change abnormality error, and the like. The low priority error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a low level. This type 2 error includes a payout error (prize ball error), a ball plate full tank error, a ball biting / ball jam error, a ballless error, and the like. The setting value abnormality error is an error that occurs when a numerical value that should not be originally set as a setting value (for example, a numerical value that is not within the range of 1 to 6) is set, and is a setting change abnormality. An error is when the power is turned off during the setting change state and an operation for shifting to a mode other than the setting change mode is performed, that is, the setting value (desired setting value) is not confirmed. Nevertheless, it is an error that occurs when it is considered that an abnormal operation has been performed when an operation for shifting to a mode other than the setting change mode is performed. Since the contents of other errors are described in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the launch of the game ball is restricted (the launch handle 12 becomes invalid) regardless of whether a type 1 error or a type 2 error occurs. You may do it.

≪Processing in setting confirmation mode≫
Next, the processing in the setting confirmation mode at the time of turning on the power will be described.

(Notification content during setting confirmation)
First, the contents of notification in the performance display monitor 830, the main control display device 27, the external information terminal board 600, the speaker 11, the frame lamp 10, and the staging display device 70 when the transition mode at the time of turning on the power is the setting confirmation mode will be described. do. FIG. 84B is a diagram showing the content of notification during the setting confirmation mode.

When the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the current setting value set before the power is turned on (when the power is turned off most recently) is displayed on the fourth display unit 834 of the performance display monitor 830. When the mode shifts to this setting confirmation mode, the numerical value indicating the set value (for example, when the set value is "1", the numerical value "1") lights up on the 7-segment SG1 to SG7 of the 4th display unit 834. After being displayed, dots are lit and displayed on the dot segment SG8 of the fourth display unit 834. That is, the current set value and the dot are displayed as a pair on the fourth display unit 834. The reason why the current setting value is displayed with dots on the 4th display unit 834 when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode is the display of the setting value when the mode is changed to the above-mentioned setting change mode (display without dots). This is to distinguish it from. In this way, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the current setting value can be confirmed.

Further, when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the error indicator lamp Er of the main control display device 27 is lit and displayed. The lighting display of the error indicator lamp Er is continuously performed from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode. The other indicator lights 71 to 79 of the main control display device 27 are turned off from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode. As a modification thereof, all the other indicator lights 71 to 79 or some of the indicator lights may be turned on or blinked. In that case, it is preferable to display a plurality of LED segments constituting each indicator lamp in full lighting display or full blinking display. As another modification, all the indicator lights of the main control display device 27 may be turned off, including the error indicator light Er of the main control display device 27.

Further, when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, a security signal is output from the external information terminal board 600 to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine. The output of this security signal is started from the start of the setting confirmation mode, and the output is stopped after a predetermined time (128 ms) has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode.

Further, when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the speaker 11 outputs a voice saying "setting value is being confirmed". This "setting value is being confirmed" voice is repeatedly output from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

Further, when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, a setting confirmation image indicating the characters "setting confirmation in progress" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. The display of the image during setting confirmation is continuously performed from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout while checking settings)
Next, the prize ball payout when the transition mode at the time of turning on the power is the setting confirmation mode will be described.

Here, a process will be described when a power cut occurs during the payout of the prize ball and the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode when the power cut is restored. Specifically, when the power is cut off while the prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit 34, the information on the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out is backed up in the storage area of the RAM 103. The power is cut off in this state. When the operation to shift to the setting confirmation mode (operation to turn on the setting key switch 810 with the RAM clear switch 820 turned off and turn on the power) is performed when the power is restored, the storage area of the RAM 103 is not stored. Information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is stored, but the payout of prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode is entered. The reason for temporarily suspending the payout of prize balls until the setting confirmation mode ends is that when shifting to this setting confirmation mode, a game clerk or the like opens the front frame 2 from the back side of the front frame 2. It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 810 or the like, and in the open state of the front frame 2, the game balls may not be normally supplied from the ball supply device on the game store side to the game machine, and the prize balls may not be paid out correctly. Because there is. Therefore, the payout of the prize balls is temporarily suspended until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout of the prize balls is restarted after the transition to the game mode.

Further, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, even if the game ball enters one of the winning openings between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the setting confirmation mode ends (for example, the general winning opening 64). I / O of the main control board 100 by forcing a game ball into the ball, forcibly opening the large winning opening 54 to enter a game ball, or forcibly turning on each winning opening switch. Even if an input signal is input to the input port of the / O port circuit 104), if the setting confirmation mode is not terminated and the game mode is not entered (main control side timer interrupt processing is activated and input processing (S53)). , Prize monitoring process (S59), prize ball control process (S60), etc.), because the main CPU 101 does not access the input port of the I / O port circuit 104, game balls can be used in various winning openings. The information that the ball has been entered is not stored in the storage area of the RAM 103, and the prize ball is not paid out during the execution of this setting confirmation mode.

If the big hit game that was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure is restarted when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode is started, during the execution of the restarted big hit game, The prize ball is not paid out based on the fact that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 during the above-mentioned setting confirmation mode, and the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 during the above-mentioned setting confirmation mode. The cumulative number of prize balls based on (including the update display) and the count-up effect are not performed. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the big prize opening 54 during the execution of the restarted big hit game (for example, the round game immediately after the return), the game ball enters the big winning opening 54. Although the prize balls are paid out based on the above, the cumulative number of prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the large prize opening 54 is not displayed (updated display) or the count-up effect is not performed. The reason for limiting the display of the cumulative number of prize balls (updated display) and the execution of the count-up effect after the jackpot game is restarted is that the game mode is set after the power off is restored or the setting confirmation mode is terminated. After the start, by displaying a predetermined power-off / recovery image (power-off / recovery screen) and a big hit medium screen (power-off / recovery-only round screen) after power-off / recovery, the prizes and the number of prize balls are related. This is because the notification that the power supply has been restored is prioritized over the notification of the information. As a variation example, when the jackpot game is restarted due to the recovery of the power off or the end of the setting confirmation mode and the start of the game mode, the predetermined power is turned off in the round game when the game is restarted. The return image (power off / return screen) is displayed, and it is normal from the start of the next round game (for example, the sixth round game if restarted from the fifth round game) of the round game at the time of restart. It may be configured to display (update display) the cumulative number of prize balls based on the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 54 and to execute the count-up effect by switching to the round effect (the effect during the big hit).

As a further modification, when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, a certain round game of the big hit game that was interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure is restarted, and the certain round. After the power-off / recovery image is displayed due to the recovery of the power-off (or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the game mode has started) during the execution of the game, a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the power-off / recovery). When 5 seconds have passed since the image was displayed, or when the certain round game is completed, the normal big hit medium production (for example, the above-mentioned super longevity big hit production, longevity big hit production, ki big hit) It may be configured to return to the effect (that is, the power is turned off and the power is turned off again during the lapse of a predetermined time, or, for example, during the round game of the third round (or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game mode is used). Is started), the normal round effect may be restored from the start of the round game of the fourth round). As described above, when the round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the big hit medium effect (super longevity big hit effect, longevity big hit effect, ki big hit effect), that is, when the big hit medium effect effect pattern is the super longevity big hit effect. Is a super long hit round screen (for example, a production screen where character introductions for 5 people are displayed on a rainbow-colored background), and in the case of a long life big hit production, a long life big hit round screen (for example, on a red background). A staging screen that displays character introductions for two people), and a staging screen that displays a character introduction for one person on a blue background (for example, a staging screen that displays a character introduction for one person on a blue background) It is configured to. In this configuration, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game after the restarted round game, but the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed instead of the cumulative number of prize balls before the power is turned off, and the game starts from "0". The cumulative prize ball counter will also be cleared to "0" to start. However, even if the game starts from "0", when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54, the cumulative prize ball number display is updated, the count-up effect, the emphasis effect (enlarged display), etc. are executed, and further restarted. If a game ball that exceeds the specified number is entered into the large winning opening 54 (over winning) during the execution of the big hit game, the over winning effect is executed, and similarly, the restarted big hit game is executed. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the cumulative prize ball number display is updated, the count-up effect is performed, and the bonus prize-winning effect is executed.

Further, as another modification, when the setting confirmation mode ends and the game mode is started, a certain round game of the jackpot game that was interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure is restarted. A predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after the power off / return image is displayed due to the return of the power off (or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the game mode has started) during the execution of a certain round game. (5 seconds have passed since the power off / return image was displayed), or when the round game ends, the screen returns to the dedicated jackpot medium screen (dedicated round screen after power off / return). (That is, the power is turned off and the power is turned off again during the lapse of a predetermined time, for example, during the round game of the third round (or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game mode is started). ) In that case, the normal round effect may be returned from the start of the fourth round game), and if such a configuration is made, the jackpot game after the restarted round game is being executed. The cumulative number of prize balls is not displayed, and even if the game ball enters the large winning opening 54, the cumulative number of prize balls display is not updated, the count-up effect, the emphasis effect (enlarged display), etc. are not executed, and the game is restarted. Even if a game ball that exceeds the specified number is entered into the large winning opening 54 (over winning) during the execution of the big hit game, the over winning effect is not executed, and similarly, the restarted big hit is performed. Even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the game, the cumulative number of winning balls display is not updated, the count-up effect, and the bonus winning effect are not executed.

(Other processing during setting confirmation)
Next, other processes when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on will be described. Even if the launch handle 12 is touched and the rotation operation is performed during the setting confirmation mode, the operation of the launch handle 12 is determined to be invalid, or the touch and the rotation operation of the launch handle 12 are not detected. (Structured to limit launch detection). That is, even if the launch handle 12 is touched and the rotation operation is performed, the game ball cannot be launched. With this configuration, by accidentally touching the launch handle 12 during the setting confirmation mode and performing a rotation operation, unexpected launch of a game ball (use of a game ball) or unexpected entry of a ball can be performed. It is possible to prevent it in advance. Further, even if the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer during the setting confirmation mode, the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is not displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode from being mistakenly recognized as having ended even though the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In addition, it is configured not to start the variation display of the special symbol during the setting confirmation mode (the special symbol variation start condition is not satisfied), and does not start the variation display of the normal symbol during the setting confirmation mode (ordinary symbol). It is configured so that the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied). With this configuration, even if there is an unexpected entry of a ball (such as the entry of a game ball staying in the game area PA) during the setting confirmation mode, an unintended hit / fail judgment and a variation display based on the judgment are performed. By not having it, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the currently set mode is the setting confirmation mode or the game mode. Further, even in the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to detect a specific error (for example, a door / frame opening error or a magnetic sensor error), but it is configured not to display an error notification related to the specific error. At the same time, it is configured so that it is possible to detect and notify an error about a predetermined error (for example, a setting value abnormality error or a setting change abnormality error). With this configuration, unlike the game mode, during the setting confirmation mode, the error notification for a specific error is restricted, and the notification of a predetermined error (error related to the setting) is prioritized to confirm the setting. It is possible to set the error notification mode suitable for the mode, and unlike the specifications that limit the firing detection, the display of the standby demo screen, and the variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols during the setting confirmation mode, about the detection of a specific error. Does not limit, so the player himself can properly grasp the current situation.

As a modification of the transition to the setting confirmation mode, the rotation operation by touching the launch handle 12 may be enabled during the setting confirmation mode (by touching the launch handle 12 and rotating the game). It is possible to launch a ball). Further, during the setting confirmation mode, the standby demo screen (customer waiting demo screen) may be displayed when the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer. Further, when an error is detected during the setting confirmation mode, an error notification image may be displayed. In that case, the error notification image is set in the layer above or below the layer of the image "Checking the setting value" above.

(Processing when returning from checking settings)
Subsequently, the processing when the setting confirmation mode is returned to the game mode will be described. Even if you continue to hold the firing handle 12 (touch the hand and rotate it) until the game mode (a specific time elapses from the start of the game mode) that shifts from the setting confirmation mode to the end of the setting confirmation mode. Even if you keep doing it, or if you keep touching it, the touch effect will not be executed (touch operation will be invalid). The touch effect means that the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12) while the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is in progress. It is an effect that is executed under the conditions. Specifically, during the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect), the player touches the launch handle 12 and then performs a rotation operation (or simply touches the launch handle 12). As a result, a voice output of "Game start!" Is output, and a specific character is displayed on the effect display device 70. When returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is achieved by the state in which the game is not performed immediately after the return or after the return (the game is interrupted) for a predetermined time or longer. It is configured to migrate to. That is, even if the launch handle 12 is continuously held until the game mode (standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) executed after the game mode starts), which shifts from the setting confirmation mode to the end of the setting confirmation mode. (Even if you keep touching and rotating, or even if you keep touching), the touch effect is not executed during the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect). There is. In addition, even if the volume button (left key or right key) is pressed and operated continuously from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode that shifts after the setting confirmation mode ends, the volume level does not change during the game mode (volume operation is performed). It is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, it is configured so that the volume level does not change (the volume operation becomes invalid) even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode. Since the volume adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration is not premised on the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode. When returning to the game mode, the volume level is set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the amount of light set before the transition to the setting confirmation mode (before the power is turned off). Of the light intensity levels of, it is always set to "3"). In addition, even if the light amount button (up key or down key) is continuously pressed and operated from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode that shifts after the setting confirmation mode ends, the light amount level does not change during the game mode (light amount operation is performed). It is configured to be invalid). Furthermore, it is configured so that the light amount level does not change (the light amount operation becomes invalid) even if the pressing operation is canceled during the game mode. Since the light amount adjustment can be executed even during the variable display in the game mode, this configuration is not premised on the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) in the game mode. When returning to the game mode, the light intensity level is set to the initial setting (for example, "1" to "5" regardless of the light intensity set before the transition to the setting confirmation mode (before the power is turned off). Be sure to use "3" of the light intensity levels of
Is set to).

<Performance information>
Next, the base value, which is the performance information of the game, will be described. The base value is, in a broad sense, the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of game balls fired by the player (the number of game balls that have reached the game area PA). However, although the base value applied in this embodiment will be described in detail later, the number of game balls fired by the player when the currently executing game state is the normal game state (game balls that have reached the game area PA). It means the ratio of the number of prize balls won by the player to (the number of).

In the present embodiment, the data related to the performance information of the game (data such as the base value, the total number of outs, the number of normal outs, the number of normal prize balls, etc., which will be described later) is stored in the performance information of the RAM 103 provided on the main control board 100. It is stored in the area 103C.

Here, FIG. 85A is a diagram schematically showing the storage area of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100. The RAM 103 is provided with a game control information storage area 103A, a set value information storage area 103B, a performance information storage area 103C, and the like. The game information storage area 103A stores information for controlling the progress of the game (information on variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on jackpot games, information on game status, information on payout of prize balls, etc.). ing. In the set value information storage area 103B, information on the set value for specifying the winning probability (big hit probability) at which the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit is stored. Information for specifying the performance information (base value) of the game is stored in the performance information storage area 103C. The performance information storage area 103C may store information used for processing for performing a test specified by a game rule. In the present embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the information stored in the set value information storage area 103B and the performance information storage area 103C is not erased.

FIG. 85B is a diagram schematically showing the performance information storage area 103C of the RAM 103. The performance information storage area 103A includes a total out number counter 1030, a normal out number counter 1031, a normal time prize ball number counter 1032, a base information storage area 1033, a base information switching counter 1034, a base information output data area 1035, and an output display. A switching counter 1036, a new start-up flag 1037, and the like are provided.

The total out number counter 1030 is a counter for counting the total out number. The "total number of outs" is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA in all game states. It should be noted that all the gaming states include a special gaming state in which the special game is being executed and a non-special gaming state in which the special game is not being executed. Further, this non-special gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a probabilistic gaming state. In the case of a gaming machine that employs a small hit rush mode as in the second embodiment described above, the non-special gaming states include a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state, and a latent probabilistic gaming state. The state and is included. In the case of a gaming machine that does not have a probability fluctuation function (for example, a small hit V model that has a fluctuation time shortening function), the non-special gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. If it is a gaming machine that does not have either the probability fluctuation function or the fluctuation time shortening function (for example, a small hit V model that does not have the fluctuation time shortening function), it will be in a non-special gaming state. Includes only normal gaming states.

The normal out number counter 1031 is a counter for counting the normal out number. The "normal time out number" is the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state).

The total number of outs and the number of normal outs are the games that detect the game balls discharged from the back side of the game board 20 (gamed balls that have entered each winning opening or out opening 29 and finished the game). It is calculated based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor 891. As another method for counting the total number of outs and the number of normal outs, for example, based on the detection information of the launch ball detection sensor that detects the number of game balls (number of launch balls) launched toward the game area PA. It may be configured to calculate the total number of outs (total number of fired balls) and the number of normal outs (normal number of fired balls). In that case, it is preferable to adopt a value obtained by subtracting the number of game balls (foul balls) that have returned without reaching the game area PA from the number of game balls launched toward the game area PA. ..

The normal prize ball number counter 1032 is a counter for counting the number of normal prize balls. The "normal number of prize balls" is the number (total number) of prize balls paid out to the player when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). That is, the number of prize balls in the normal time does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the game state (special game state) when the big hit game is executed in the low probability low base state, and in the low probability low base state. Only the number of prize balls paid out in the game state (normal game state) when the jackpot game is not executed is included. Therefore, in the normal game state, the number of prize balls at the normal time is such that the game ball enters the first starting port 51, the game ball enters the second starting port 52, and the game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 64. It is the cumulative number of prize balls paid according to the number of balls entered. In the present embodiment, each time a game ball enters a winning opening (a winning opening excluding the large winning opening 54) that is the target of paying out the prize ball in the normal game state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening. Is cumulatively added to the normal prize ball counter 1032 (the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding to the normal prize ball counter 1032 of the RAM 103). As another method for counting the number of prize balls in the normal time, the number of prize balls in the normal time is counted based on the detection information of the prize ball count sensor that counts the number of prize balls actually paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34. You may.

The base information storage area 1033 is an area for storing a base value indicating game performance information. The "base value" is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal outs. That is, the base value is paid out to the player for the number (total number) of game balls discharged from the game area PA when the currently executing game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). It is a ratio of the number (total number) of prize balls that have been made, and is a value calculated by the calculation formula of "number of prize balls in normal time / number of outs in normal time x 100". Therefore, the base value in this example is the base value measured in the normal gaming state, and means the base value in the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) or the base value in the special gaming state. It's not something to do.

Although the details will be described later, this base value is calculated for each preset management section (basically, for each section until the value of the total out number counter 1030 reaches "60,000"). The base values calculated in each management section are sequentially stored in the base information storage area 1033. The base information storage area 1033 is the current base value storage area 1033a that stores the base value (current base value) calculated in real time in the currently executing section, and the previous section (1 of the currently executing section). The base value storage area 1033b, which stores the base value (first base value) calculated when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 in the previous section), and the second previous section (current execution). 2 times before base value storage area 1033c to store the base value (2 times before base value) calculated when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 in the middle section (2 times before) and 3 times before 3 times before base value storage area 1033d that stores the base value (3 times before base value) calculated when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 in the section (the section 3 times before the currently executing section) It consists of. Although the details will be described later, the base value is not calculated in the section where the total number of outs is less than 299 (section A described later) from the time when the gaming machine is first turned on (when newly started up). ..

The base information switching counter 1034 is a counter for switching the base value displayed on the performance display monitor 830. When the value of the base information switching counter 1034 is "0", the base value of the current section is displayed on the performance display monitor 830, and when the value of the base information switching counter is "1", the performance display monitor 830 is displayed as 1. The base value of the previous section is displayed, and when the value of the base information switching counter is "2", the base value of the previous section is displayed on the performance display monitor 830, and the base information switching counter 1034 is displayed. When the value of is "3", the performance display monitor 830 displays the base value of the section three times before.

The base information output data area 1035 is an area for storing the display data of the four display units 831 to 834 in the performance display monitor 830. Although not shown, the base information output data area 1035 includes a first output data area for storing the display data of the first display unit 831 and a second output data area for storing the display data of the second display unit 832. It has a third output data area for storing the display data of the third display unit 833 and a fourth output data area for storing the display data of the fourth display unit 834.

The output display switching timer 1036 is a timer for switching the display data stored in the base information output data area 1035. In the present embodiment, the display data stored in the base information output data area 1035 is switched at a predetermined cycle based on the timed value of the output display switching timer 1036.

The new start-up flag 1037 is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine is turned on for the first time (at the time of new start-up). That is, if the new start-up flag 1037 is ON, it indicates that the power of the gaming machine is turned on for the first time, and if the new start-up flag 1037 is OFF, it indicates that it is not the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on for the first time. The new start-up flag 1037 is turned off immediately after the first power-on of the gaming machine (immediately after the new start-up) (preferably, it is turned off at least during the first power-on). As a modification, the new start-up flag 1037 may be turned off when the counting by the total out number counter 1030 is started when the power of the gaming machine is turned on for the first time.

≪Display of base value≫
Next, the display of the base value will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78 above, the performance display monitor 830 displays the base value. As described above, the performance display monitor 830 has an identification display unit (identification segment) 830a composed of a first display unit 831 and a second display unit 832 of the upper two digits, and a third display unit 833 and a third display unit of the lower two digits. It has a ratio display unit (ratio segment) 830b including four display units 834. In addition, in this specification, "lighting" is used in the concept of including both continuous lighting and blinking lighting, but in order to distinguish between them, continuous lighting is simply "lighting" or "lighting". It is called "display", and blinking lighting may be simply called "blinking" or "blinking display".

In the identification segment 830a, an identifier for identifying the type of the base value (the section for managing the base value) is displayed. That is, the identification segment 830a has "bL.", Which indicates that it is the base value of the current section, "b1.", Which indicates that it is the base value of the previous section, and the base value of the section two times before. It is possible to display "b2.", Which indicates that there is, and "bL3.", Which indicates that it is the base value of the third section (base value three times before) (details will be described later).

In the ratio segment 830b, the calculation result of the base value corresponding to the identifier (measurement section) displayed on the identification segment 830a is displayed. That is, in the ratio segment 830b, the base value of the current section (real-time value), the base value of the previous section (final result value), the base value of the previous section (final result value), and three times before. It is possible to display the base value (final result value) of the section of (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the "display of the base value" means that the display of the identification seg 830a and the display of the ratio seg 830b are displayed together, except for special cases.

Here, FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of the base value of each section. As described above, the base value is measured for each predetermined management section (each section A, section B, section C, section D, etc. described later) set in advance. On the performance display monitor 830, the base value of the current section is displayed (FIG. 86 (B)), the base value of the previous section is displayed (FIG. 86 (C)), and the base of the previous section is displayed. The display of the value (FIG. 86 (D)) and the display of the base value of the section three times before (FIG. 86 (E)) are switched and displayed at specific time (predetermined display switching time). In this embodiment, "4.8 seconds" is set as the display switching time of the base value. The process of switching the display of the base value is performed based on the value of the above-mentioned base information switching counter 1034.

First, in the display of the base value of the current section, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), "bL." Is lit or blinked on the identification seg 830a, and the ratio seg 830b is the real-time measurement currently being measured. The base value (the base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a) is lit and displayed. Further, in the display of the base value of the section one time before, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), "b1." Is lit or blinked on the identification seg 830a, and the ratio seg 830b is displayed one time before. The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033b one time before) is lit and displayed. Further, in the display of the base value of the section two times before, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), "b2." Is lit or blinked on the identification seg 830a, and the ratio seg 830b is displayed twice before. The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033c two times before) is lit and displayed. Further, in the display of the base value of the section three times before, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), "b3." Is lit or blinked on the identification seg 830a, and the ratio seg 830b is displayed three times before. The base value at the end of the section (the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033d three times before) is lit and displayed.

In the ratio segment 830b, the first decimal place of the measurement result of the base value is rounded off, and the integer part (integer value) after the rounding is displayed. For example, when the measurement result of the base value is 35.49, "35" is displayed on the ratio segment 830b, and when the measurement result of the base value is 35.50, "36" is displayed on the ratio segment 830b. If the value after rounding off the measurement result of the base value is less than 10, "0" is displayed in the tens digit of the ratio segment 830b (for example, "00" to "09"). If the value after rounding off the measurement result of the base value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. That is, if the rounded value is 99, "99" is displayed in the ratio segment 830b, and if the rounded value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the ratio segment 830b. (Display dots). This is because the ratio segment 830b of the performance display monitor 830 can display the base value only as a two-digit numerical value, so "99." is displayed (dot is displayed after 99) and the base value is 100%. This is to notify that the value is exceeded. As a modification, the base value measurement result may be rounded off to the first decimal place to display only the integer part (integer value), and even if it is configured in that way, it is rounded off. If the value after rounding is 99, "99" is displayed on the ratio segment 830b, and if the value after rounding is 100 or more, "99." is displayed on the ratio segment 830b (dots are displayed). do).

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored), as shown in FIG. 86 (A), all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 are used for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds). A full blinking display (also referred to as "initial display") is performed in which the lighting state and the all-off state are repeated at predetermined intervals (predetermined cycle). This predetermined interval (predetermined cycle) is 0.6 seconds in this embodiment, and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets. That is, the initial display (full blinking display) of the performance display monitor 830 is the all LED segments SG1 to SG8 (32 LEDs in total) of the four display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The segment) is displayed blinking. Then, in this embodiment, FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E)
As shown in the above, after the initial display (full blinking display) of the performance display monitor 830 is completed, the base value display (switching of the base value display) is performed. During the initial display period of this performance display monitor 830 (during the full blinking display period), the timer interrupt process on the main control side is activated, and the special electric accessory control process (opening of the large prize opening 54 before the power is turned off). Games such as processing to return to the state), prize ball control processing (processing to pay out unpaid prize balls before the power is turned off, etc.), LED output processing (processing to control lighting of the main control display device 27, etc.), special symbol control processing, etc. Mode processing is being executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the display of the base value may differ depending on the transition mode at the time of turning on the power. For example, when the game mode is entered when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the base value is displayed after the initial display (full blinking display) of 830 is executed for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) on the performance display monitor. It will be started. On the other hand, if the RAM clear mode, setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the RAM clear mode, setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, and the initial display of the performance display monitor 830 (all). After the blinking display) is executed for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds), the display of the base value is started. The predetermined time (initial display time, full blinking display time) is not limited to the above-mentioned 4.8 seconds, but is, for example, a time from 4.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds (5 seconds ± 10%). It is desirable to set it to (time).

≪Flow of base value measurement≫
Next, the flow of measuring the base value from the first power-on of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the identification segment 830a and the ratio segment 830b for each management section (measurement section). The "first power-on of the gaming machine" is the first start-up of the gaming machine when the power is turned on for the first time. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is the first power-on of the gaming machine based on the state of the new start-up flag 1037 provided in the performance information storage area 103C. That is, if the new start-up flag is ON, it indicates that the power of the gaming machine is turned on for the first time, and if the new start-up flag is OFF, it indicates that the power of the gaming machine is not turned on for the first time. In the present embodiment, when the new rise flag 1037 is ON, the section A described later (the period during which the identifier is blinked and displayed on the identification segment 830b and “---” is lit and displayed on the ratio segment 830b). Counting at is started. When the power of this game machine is turned on for the first time, all the values such as the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, the normal time prize ball number counter 1032, and the base information storage area 1033 are set to the initial values "0". Has been done. Further, when the currently executing section ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal prize ball number counter 1032 are cleared. Further, when the currently executing section (excluding the section A described later) ends and shifts to the next section, it is stored in the one-time previous base value storage area 1033b and the second previous base value storage area 1033c. The base value of the past section is shifted to the base value storage area of the previous section (2 times previous base value storage area 1033c and 3 times previous base value storage area 1033d), and the current base value storage area 1033a is used. The final value of the stored base value of the current section (the base value when the total number of outs reaches 60,000) is shifted to the previous base value storage area 1033b one time, and the current base value storage area 1033a is stored. clear. The base value stored in the base value storage area 1033d three times before is erased by shifting and overwriting the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033c two times before.

First, in the section where the value of the total out number counter 1030 is less than 299 (referred to as "section A") from the time when the power is turned on for the first time, the purpose is to inspect the gaming machine and test run (adjustment) at the gaming store. This is the section (test section) where the game ball is launched and the prize is won, and since an accurate base value cannot be obtained, it is excluded from the calculation of the base value. That is, this section A is set as a section in which the normal time out number counter 1031 and the normal time prize ball number counter 1032 are not counted (a section in which the base value is not calculated). However, even during the execution of this section A, the total out number counter 1030 is counted in order to determine the switching of the section (to determine the switching to the next section).

When displaying the base value of the section A currently being executed, "bL." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit up on the ratio seg 830b. That is, the blinking display of "bL." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b indicate that the base value of the section A currently being executed cannot be displayed. In addition, since the previous section (section from 1 time before to 3 times before) does not exist, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section from 1 time before to 3 times before), the ratio segment 830b "---" is lit up and displayed. Specifically, when displaying the base value of the previous section, "b1." Is displayed in blinking on the identification seg 830a, and "---" is lit on the ratio seg 830b. The blinking display of "b1." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b indicate that the base value of the previous section cannot be displayed yet. Further, when displaying the base value of the section two times before, "b2." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit up on the ratio seg 830b. The blinking display of "b2." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b indicate that the base value of the section two times before cannot be displayed yet. Further, when displaying the base value of the section three times before, "b3." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit up on the ratio seg 830b. The blinking display of "b3." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b indicate that the base value of the section three times before cannot be displayed yet. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Then, when the currently executing section A ends when the value of the total out number counter 1030 from the first power-on reaches 299, a new section (referred to as "section B") is started. .. When the section A currently being executed ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal time prize ball number counter 1032 are reset (zero clear) as described above. Further, the values stored in the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage areas, respectively.

The section B ends when the value of the total out number counter 1030 reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section A. In the section B, the current base value is calculated in real time, and the real-time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area 1033a of the RAM 103. When displaying the base value of the section B currently being executed, if the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), "bL." Is blinked and displayed on the identification segment 830a. The base value (lil time value) of the current section B, that is, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a is lit and displayed on the ratio segment 830b. Here, the reason why the identification segment 830a is blinked and displayed when the value of the out number counter 1031 in the normal time is less than 6000 is that the number of samples is used to calculate the base value of the current section in the measurement result of less than 6000. This is to notify that the base value is not stable because there are few. On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit and displayed on the identification seg 830a, and the base value (lil time value) of the current section B is displayed on the ratio seg 830b, that is, The base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is lit and displayed. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Further, in this section B, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section A), "b1." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit on the ratio seg 830b. indicate. This is because the base value is not calculated in the previous section (section A), so the blinking display of "b1." In the identification segment 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio segment 830b once. It is shown that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the section two times before, "b2." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit up on the ratio seg 830b. This is because the section two times before does not exist, so the base value of the section two times before is still displayed by the blinking display of "b2." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b. Shown to be impossible. Further, when displaying the base value of the section three times before, "b3." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit up on the ratio seg 830b. This is because the section three times before does not exist, so the base value of the section three times before is still displayed by the blinking display of "b3." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b. Shown to be impossible. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Then, when the currently executing section B ends when the value of the total out number counter 1030 reaches 60,000, a new section (referred to as “section C”) is started. When the section B currently being executed ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal time prize ball number counter 1032 are cleared, as described above. Further, the values stored in the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage areas, respectively.

The section C ends when the value of the total out number counter 1030 reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section B. In the section C, the current base value is calculated in real time and the real-time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area 1033a of the RAM 103, as in the previous section B. When displaying the base value of the currently executing section C, if the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), "bL." Is blinked and displayed on the identification segment 830a. At the same time, the base value (lil time value) of the current section C, that is, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a is lit and displayed on the ratio segment 830b. On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit and displayed on the identification seg 830a, and the base value (lil time value) of the current section C is displayed on the ratio seg 830b, that is, The base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is lit and displayed. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Further, in this section C, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section B), "b1." Is lit and displayed on the identification segment 830a, and the section immediately before the ratio segment 830b (section B). The final value of the base value in the section B), that is, the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033b one time before is lit and displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the section two times before, "b2." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit up on the ratio seg 830b. This is because the base value is not calculated in the section (section A) two times before, so the blinking display of "b2." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b are used twice. It is shown that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the section three times before, "b3." Is displayed blinking on the identification seg 830a and "---" is lit up on the ratio seg 830b. This is because the section three times before does not exist, so the base value of the section three times before is still displayed by the blinking display of "b3." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b. Shown to be impossible. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Then, when the currently executing section C ends when the value of the total out number counter 1030 reaches 60,000, a new section (referred to as “section D”) is started. note that,
When the section C currently being executed ends, as described above, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal time prize ball number counter 1032 are cleared. Further, the values stored in the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage areas, respectively.

The section D ends when the value of the total out number counter reaches 60,000, counting from the end of the previous section C. In the section D, the current base value is calculated in real time and the real-time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area 1033a of the RAM 103, as in the previous section C. When displaying the base value of the currently executing section D, if the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is less than 6000 (0 to 5999), "bL." Is blinked and displayed on the identification segment 830a. At the same time, the base value (lil time value) of the current section D, that is, the base value (real-time value) stored in the current base value storage area 1033a is lit and displayed on the ratio segment 830b. On the other hand, when the value of the normal out number counter 1031 is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit and displayed on the identification seg 830a, and the base value (lil time value) of the current section D is displayed on the ratio seg 830b, that is, The base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is lit and displayed. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Further, in this section D, when displaying the base value of the previous section (section C), "b1." Is lit and displayed on the identification segment 830a, and the section immediately before the ratio segment 830b (section C). The final value of the base value in the section C), that is, the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033b one time before is lit and displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the section (section B) two times before, "b2." Is lit and displayed on the identification segment 830a, and the base value of the section (section B) two times before is displayed on the ratio segment 830b. The final value of the value, that is, the base value stored in the base value storage area 1033c two times before is lit and displayed. Further, when displaying the base value of the section (section A) three times before, "b3." Is blinked and displayed on the identification segment 830a, and "---" is lit and displayed on the ratio segment 830b. This is because the base value is not calculated in the section (section A) three times before, so the blinking display of "b3." In the identification seg 830a and the lighting display of "---" in the ratio seg 830b three times. It is shown that the base value of the previous interval cannot be displayed. In this embodiment, this blinking display is performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

Then, when the currently executing section D ends when the value of the total out number counter 1030 reaches 60,000, a new section (referred to as “section E”) is started. When the section D currently being executed ends, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031, and the normal time prize ball number counter 1032 are cleared, as described above. Further, the values stored in the base value storage areas 1033a to 1033d are shifted to the previous storage areas, respectively.

After that, every time the total out number counter reaches 60,000 after each section is started, the section ends and a new section is started. That is, in FIG. 87, the section A to the section D are shown due to space limitations, but when the section D ends, a new section E starts, and when the section E ends, a new section F starts, and then. The start and end of each section are performed when the total number of outs counter reaches 60,000, such as sections G, H, and so on.

≪Relationship between performance display and expected value of prize ball acquisition≫
Next, the relationship between the performance display and the expected value of winning the prize ball will be described. FIG. 88 is a time chart when the first hit occurs during the execution of the section A. In the present embodiment, the identification segment 830a (identifier) of the performance display monitor 830 is blinked and displayed from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until a predetermined period elapses. Specifically, as described above, when the measurement section currently being executed is section A, that is, the total number of outs is less than a predetermined number x 1 (299) counting from the first power-on of the gaming machine. In that case, the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 is blinking and displayed. Further, in the next section B after the end of this section A, that is, in the section B from the end of the section A to the total number of outs reaching 60,000, the calculation is performed from the start of the section B. When the number of outs in the normal state is less than a predetermined number X2 (6000), the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 is blinking and displayed. As a modification, in the next section B after the end of this section A, that is, in the section B from the end of the section A to the total number of outs reaching 60,000, the calculation is performed from the first power-on. When the number of outs in the normal state is less than a predetermined number X2 (6000), the identification segment 830a of the performance display monitor 830 may be configured to blink. When the identifier blinking and displayed on the identification seg 830a is an identifier (bL) indicating the current section, the real-time value of the base value measured in the current section is lit and displayed on the ratio seg 830b. .. In this embodiment, these blinking displays are performed at 0.6 second intervals (0.6 second cycle), and "lighting 0.3 seconds → blinking 0.3 seconds" is repeated for 8 sets.

On the other hand, the expected value of winning the prize ball (theoretical prize ball number) paid out during the execution of the big hit game performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal game state is the predetermined value described above. The number is set to X1 (299) or more. That is, the expected value of winning a prize ball (theoretical number of prize balls) at the time of the first hit is set to a predetermined number X1 (299 pieces) or more, which is a trigger for the end of the section A. Specifically, the jackpot type of the first special symbol includes "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" and "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)", and both jackpot types are the specified rounds of the jackpot game. Since the number is set to 4 rounds and all the round games are open round games for a long time (long open round games), the expected value of winning the prize ball at the time of the first hit is 600 in any big hit type. The number is (4 rounds x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 600). As described above, in the present embodiment, the expected value of winning the prize ball (600 pieces) at the time of the first hit is set to the predetermined number X1 (299 pieces) or more, which is the trigger for the end of the section A, as the reached value of the total number of outs. Is set to. That is, if the first hit is drawn while staying in the section A, it is possible to obtain a larger number of prize balls (maximum 600) than the predetermined number X1 (299) that triggers the end of the section A. .. Therefore, if the first hit can be drawn while staying in this section A, while the number of prize balls (up to 600) acquired in the first hit is launched toward the game area PA as one's own ball. There is a high possibility that the game balls discharged from the game area PA, that is, the total number of outs will reach a predetermined number X1 (299), and the total number of outs will reach a predetermined number X1 (299). It is expected that the section A will shift to the section B. As a result, the base value was hidden during the stay in the section A (“−−” was displayed in the identification segment 830b), but the base value is displayed in real time by shifting to the section B. As a result, in this embodiment, when the first hit is subtracted at an early stage after the first power of the gaming machine is turned on, the number of prize balls (600) acquired in the big hit game performed with the first hit as an opportunity is used up. By then, section A (test section) can be terminated and moved to the next section B to make the performance display function (the base value of the current section can be displayed in real time), and fraudulent activity (issue). It is possible to detect (whether there is any abnormality in the ball performance) at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expected value of winning a prize ball during the consecutive villa including this first hit (that is, the expected value of winning a prize ball paid out in the big hit game performed from the first hit to the end of the consecutive villa state) is , It is set to a predetermined number X2 (6000 pieces) or less. That is, in this embodiment, the probability variation inrush rate (65%) and the ST continuation rate (set value) are set so that the expected value of winning the prize balls in the consecutive villas including the first hit is the predetermined number x 2 (6000) or less. 1 = 63% to set value 6 = 76%), the number of theoretical prize balls for each jackpot game (4R jackpot = 600, 8R jackpot = 1200), and the like are set. According to such a configuration, it seems difficult to obtain the number of balls required to cancel the blinking of the performance display monitor 830 (the number of balls required to reach 6000 outs at normal times) at the first hit. By setting (that is, by requiring multiple first hits), the game ball that was acquired immediately after the first hit occurred and continued the normal firing (the game is continued until the ball is exhausted). Even if it is), it is possible to prevent the performance display monitor 830 from blinking unless the game ball is fired any more, and the base value can be managed more accurately. In addition, the expected value of winning the prize ball in this consecutive villa is the expected value of winning the prize ball that can be obtained before returning to the normal game state (low probability low base state) based on the big hit type at the time of the first hit and its selection rate. It is preferably a value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the shortest digestion time required for digesting the jackpot game at the time of the first hit and the shortest digestion time required for digesting the electric support state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game are obtained. It is set in relation to the expected value (theoretical prize ball number). Here, the rate of fire of the game balls is set up to 100 per minute, and it takes 6 minutes to launch all the prize balls (expected value of winning balls: 600) to be paid out at the time of the first hit. Is required. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shortest digestion time of the jackpot game performed at the time of the first hit (digestion time when the game ball is constantly hit during the execution of the jackpot game) and the electric support that shifts after the end of the jackpot game. The total time with the shortest digestion time of the state (digestion time when the game ball is constantly hit and the hold is not interrupted during the execution of 100 electric support states) is configured to be 6 minutes or more. As a result, all the prize balls (theoretical prize balls) obtained at the time of the first hit will be launched until the subsequent electric support state is exited, provided that the game balls are continuously launched. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to satisfy the emphasis effect execution condition for executing the above-mentioned emphasis effect (enlarged display), the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls). As a condition, the predetermined number of prize balls (minimum value of the specific value) corresponds to a numerical value of a predetermined number X1 (299 pieces) or more and a predetermined number X2 (6000 pieces) or less. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the emphasis effect (enlarged display) is performed every time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500). At least one highlighting effect (enlarged display) is executed between the time when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the predetermined number X1 (299) or more and the time when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the predetermined number X2 (6000). (In this embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls reaches 2500 between the time when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the predetermined number X1 (299) or more and the time when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the predetermined number X2 (6000). When it reaches 5000 pieces, the emphasis effect is performed twice.) In this way, by reducing the emphasis effect execution condition from the cancellation condition of the blinking display of the identification segment 830a, the emphasis effect execution condition can be satisfied even in the game start situation in which the blinking display is not canceled. It is possible to enhance the sexuality and generate an emphasis effect from an early stage to increase the player's motivation to play.

≪Update of base value during initial display period when power is turned on≫
Next, the process of updating the base value during the initial display period will be described. FIG. 89 (A) is a time chart showing an initial display period when the gaming state at the time of power off / returning is the special gaming state, and FIG. 89 (B) is the game state at the time of power off / returning is the normal gaming state. It is a time chart showing an initial display period.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored), all the display units 831 to 834 of the performance display monitor 830 are lit for a predetermined time (4.8 seconds). A full blinking display (initial display) is performed in which the display state and the off state are repeated every 0.3 seconds. Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), when the gaming state at the time of power-off / recovery is the low base state (special gaming state) during the big hit game, the initial performance display monitor 830 at the time of turning on the power. During the display period, the total out number counter 1030 is counted, and the determination process for switching to the next section (section switching process) is executed, but the normal out number counter 1031 and the normal time prize ball are executed. The number counter 1032 is not counted, and the arithmetic processing for updating the base value (base value update processing) is not executed. That is, if the ball entry detection to the first starting port 51, the general winning openings 61 to 64, etc. and the out detection related to the ball entry are performed during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 at the time of turning on the power, the initial ball entry detection is performed. During the display period, the determination process for switching to the next section (section switching process) is executed, but the arithmetic process for updating the base value (base value update process) is not executed, so the initial display is performed. After the period ends, it is possible that the section has been switched to a section different from the section before the power was cut off, but the base value before the power was turned off will not be changed (when the section has not been switched to a section different from the section before the power was cut off). In the case where the base value in the current section "bL." Is not updated and the section is switched to a section different from the section before the power is turned off, in the section "bL." Before the power is turned off. The base value in "b1.", Which is the section after the power is turned off and restored after switching to the base value and after the end of the initial display period, is not updated and is the same). The base value update process is started after the end of the initial display period. As a modification, if the special gaming state continues even after the initial display period ends, this base value update process is performed at least until the special gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered (more specifically). , Until the high base state that shifts after the end of this special gaming state ends and the normal gaming state ends), the base value update process may not be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89B, when the gaming state at the time of power-off / recovery is the low base state (normal gaming state) during the non-big hit game, the initial performance display monitor 830 at the time of turning on the power. During the display period, the total out number counter 1030, the normal out number counter 1031 and the normal time prize ball number counter 1032 are counted, and the determination process (section switching process) for switching to the next section and the base. The arithmetic processing for updating the value (base value updating processing) is executed respectively. That is, if the ball entry detection to the first starting port 51, the general winning openings 61 to 64, etc. and the out detection related to the ball entry are performed during the initial display period of the performance display monitor 830 at the time of turning on the power, the initial ball entry detection is performed. During the display period, the determination process for switching to the next section (section switching process) and the arithmetic process for updating the base value (base value update process) are executed, respectively, so that the initial display period After the end, there is a possibility that the section has been switched to a section different from the section before the power off, and the base value before the power off may have been changed (a section different from the section before the power off). If it is not switched to, the base value in the current section "bL." Is updated, and if it is switched to a section different from the section before the power is turned off, it is the section before the power is turned off. The base value in "b1." And the base value in "b1.", Which is the section after the power is turned off and restored after switching to "bL." And after the end of the initial display period, may be updated and different). As a result, in the present embodiment, even if the gaming state at the time of power-off / recovery (when the power is turned on) is the same low base state, it is either the low base state during the big hit game (special game state) or the low during the non-big hit game. Depending on whether it is in the base state (normal gaming state), it is possible to switch whether or not to calculate the base value during the initial display period when the power is turned off and back (when the power is turned on), and the performance of the gaming machine is appropriate. It is possible to evaluate it. Further, regardless of whether the low base state is during the big hit game or the low base state during the non-big hit game, the total out number counter 1030 is counted during the initial display when the power is turned off and back (when the power is turned on). Then, each section (section A, B, C, D ...) can be appropriately switched. The above-mentioned power-off recovery (power recovery) is a power-off recovery without RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation), and a power-off recovery with RAM clear (RAM clear switch 820 operation). If it is a return, it shifts to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

When this initial display period ends, the count of the base information switching counter 1034 starts from "0". Therefore, after the initial display period ends, the performance display monitor 830 starts from displaying the base value of the current section. Then, when the base value of the current section is displayed for 4.8 seconds, as described above, the base value of the previous section is displayed, the base value of the previous section is displayed, and the base value of the previous section is displayed three times. The previous base value is displayed in order for 4.8 seconds each, and the base value of the current section is displayed again.

As a modification, the count of the base information switching counter 1034 is started at the start of the initial display period, and the count value of the base information switching counter 1034 is switched every 4.8 seconds even during the initial display period (internal). Each section may be switched every 4.8 seconds), and at the end of the initial display period, the base value of the section corresponding to the timing at the end may be displayed.

≪Update of base value when prize ball error occurs≫
Next, the update of the base value when an error related to the payout of the prize ball (prize ball error) occurs during the execution of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 90 is a time chart when a prize ball error occurs during the execution of the jackpot game. The prize ball error means the same error as the payout error described in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, when a prize ball error (payout error) occurs during the execution of the jackpot game, the prize ball is temporarily paid out from the time when the prize ball error occurs until the prize ball error is cleared. It will be stopped. Therefore, if a prize ball error occurs while the prize ball is being paid due to the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 54 during the execution of the big hit game, the prize ball error is canceled. Until then, of the prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54, the payout of the prize balls not paid out until the prize ball error occurs is stopped. .. Further, even during the execution of the big hit game, if the game ball enters the big prize opening 54 after the prize ball error occurs, the big prize is won until the prize ball error is cleared. The payout of the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 54 is stopped. Here, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the probabilistic game state (high probability high base state) or the time-saving game state (low probability high base state), and the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times in this high base state. If you do (that is, if you cannot draw a big hit during 100 rotations), you will fall into the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) after the end of this 100 rotations, but this normal gaming state (low) When the above-mentioned prize ball error is canceled in the low probability low base state), the payout of the prize ball is restarted in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). In other words, the prize ball that should have been paid out during the execution of the big hit game (the prize ball that was not paid out during the execution of the big hit game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error) is in a high base state after the end of the big hit game. It will be paid out in the normal game state that has been transferred through. Here, the normal prize ball number counter 1032 counts the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state, and this is a winning opening (large winning opening) in which the game ball is used during the execution of the normal gaming state. The number of prize balls paid out in the normal gaming state when the ball enters the ball (excluding 54) is counted. Therefore, when the prize ball that should normally be paid out during the execution of the big hit game (the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54) is to be paid out in the subsequent normal game state. Is excluded from the counting target of the normal prize ball number counter 1032. That is, when the prize ball that was not paid out during the execution of the big hit game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error is to be paid out in the subsequent normal game state based on the cancellation of the prize ball error. The number of prize balls is not included in the counting of the prize ball counter 1032 at normal times, and is excluded from the calculation of the base value so that the base value can be properly managed.

As described above, the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54 that was not paid out during the execution of the big hit game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error during the execution of the big hit game. , The number of game balls (number of prizes) entered into the large winning opening 54 is used for the game, although it is not the target of counting of the normal prize ball count counter 1032 and is not the target of updating the base value. It is counted by the total out number counter 1030 as a valid game ball (game ball discharged from the game area PA), and is treated as a valid count value for switching the interval of the base value.

In addition, if the prize ball is not paid out due to the occurrence of a prize ball error during the execution of the big hit game, not only the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 54, but also other prize balls such as bonus prizes. Prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the winning openings (first starting opening 51, second starting opening 52, general winning openings 61 to 64) are not counted by the normal prize ball count counter 1032. It is not subject to base value updates. In addition, the number of game balls (number of winnings) entered into other winning openings (first starting opening 51, second starting opening 52, general winning openings 61 to 64) during the execution of the jackpot game is also the game area PA. Since it should be counted as the number of valid outs (number of shots) provided for the game, the total number of outs counter 1030 is subject to update.

Further, when a prize ball error occurs during the execution of the big hit game, that is, as described above, the prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 during the execution of the big hit game. A prize ball error occurs during the game, and the prize ball error continues until the normal game state that shifts through the probabilistic game state after the end of the jackpot game, and then the prize ball error is resolved in the normal game state. In that case, even if there is a prize ball that was not paid out during the execution of the jackpot game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error after the prize ball error occurred during the execution of the jackpot game. (Even if the payout of prize balls is restricted), the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 54 (the trigger for the generation of prize balls that were not paid out until the prize ball error was resolved) The cumulative prize ball number display is updated and displayed in the wake of the game ball entering the large prize opening 54 (when the value of the cumulative prize ball count counter is added).
A count-up effect is executed. Further, even after the prize ball error has occurred, the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 (the opportunity for the prize ball to be generated for the amount not paid out until the prize ball error is resolved). With the fulfillment of the emphasis staging execution condition based on (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54) (the value of the cumulative prize ball counter reaches a double value of the predetermined number of prize balls). ), The emphasis effect (enlarged display) is executed, and the over-prize effect is executed when the conditions for executing the over-prize effect are satisfied.

≪Update cycle of base value display≫
Next, the update cycle when updating the display of the base value will be described. In the present embodiment, in each section (measurement section) other than the first section A, until the normal out number counter 1031 reaches 6000, the identification segment 830a is displayed when displaying the base value of the section currently being executed. "BL." Is blinking and displayed, and the real-time value of the base value is lit and displayed on the ratio segment 830b. At this time, the blinking display of the identification segment 830a (the blinking display of "bL.") Is performed in such a manner that the lighting for 0.3 seconds and the extinguishing for 0.3 seconds are alternately repeated. That is, in the present embodiment, the blinking cycle of the identification segment 830a is set to 0.6 seconds (lighting 0.3 seconds + extinguishing 0.3 seconds). Switching between lighting and extinguishing in the blinking display of the identification segment 830a is executed based on the clock value of the output display switching timer 1036 of the RAM 103. In the present embodiment, the timed value of the output display switching timer 1036 is added by "1" for each interrupt (every 4 ms) of the main control side timer interrupt processing, and the timed value of the output display switching timer 1036 is "75". When the multiple value of is reached, that is, when 0.3 seconds (4 ms × 75 = 300 ms) has elapsed, the identification segment 830a is switched on and off. That is, every time the measured value of the output display switching timer 1036 reaches a multiple value of "75", the lighting data of the identifier is set in the first output data area and the second output data area of the base information output data area 1035. The process and the process of setting the extinguished data are switched alternately.

On the other hand, when displaying the base value of the section currently being executed in the ratio segment 830a, the base value of the current section corresponds to the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. Set the display data. Here, in the currently executing section, a base value (real-time value) is calculated for each interrupt of the timer interrupt process, and this real-time value is sequentially stored in the current base value storage area 1033a of the RAM 103. At this time, the display data corresponding to the base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a is set in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. However, the update cycle of this display data is the same cycle as the blinking cycle of the ratio segment 830a described above. That is, the update cycle of the display data is not performed every cycle in which the base value is calculated (4 ms corresponding to one interrupt), but every 0.6 seconds (600 ms) corresponding to the blinking cycle of the ratio segment 830a. Therefore, every time the measured value of the output display switching timer 1036 reaches a multiple value of "150", the display data of the ratio segment 830b is displayed in the third output data area and the fourth output data area of the base information output data area 1035. The process of setting is performed. Therefore, if the ratio segment is displayed for 0.3 seconds and then turned off for 0.3 seconds as one blinking display (unit display), this one unit display is started (0). The display data of the ratio segment 830a will be updated at (when the lighting display for 3 seconds is started). As a result, when the display data of the ratio segment 830b is updated at the start of the one blinking display of the identification segment 830a, the base value currently stored in the base value storage area 1033a within the period of the one blinking display. Even if (current base value) is updated, the display data of the ratio segment 830b is not updated (the base value lit and displayed on the ratio segment 830b does not switch), and until the one blinking display ends. , The base value corresponding to the display data updated at the start of the one blinking display is continuously lit and displayed. Then, when the one blinking display ends and the next blinking display starts, the display data of the ratio segment 830b is the current base value (current base value stored in the current base value storage area 1033a). ) Is updated to new display data, and the base value displayed on the ratio segment 830b is also switched to the current base value (real-time value) according to the new display data. By synchronizing the blinking cycle of the identifier displayed on the identifier segment 830a with the update cycle of the base value (real-time value) displayed on the ratio segment 830b in this way, the visibility of the base value can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the performance of the game accurately and easily.

In this embodiment, assuming that all the displays or some of the displays of the performance display monitor 830 are blinking, all the display units 831 to 834 are displayed in the initial display of the performance display monitor 830 when the power is turned on. The identification segment 830a (first display unit 831 and second display unit 832) blinks when the display is blinking and before the value of the out count counter reaches 6000 in each section (excluding section A). It may be done. At this time, regarding the blinking cycle of each display unit 831 to 834 (0.6 seconds described above), the blinking cycle of the initial display performed when the power is turned on and the normal out number counter in each section (excluding section A). It is set to the same cycle as the blinking cycle of the identification segment 830a performed until the value reaches 6000. Then, this blinking cycle (0.6 seconds) is the count-up display time (execution time of the count-up effect) of 15 prize balls paid out based on the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening 54. It is set for a longer time than. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the count-up display time for one prize ball (the time required for the count-up display from "N" to "N + 1") is set to "0.03 seconds". Count-up display time (count-up display from "N" to "N + 15") for the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given by one game ball entering the large winning opening 54 (Time required for) is "15 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up display time for one piece) = 0.45 seconds", so that each display unit 831 to 834 blinks (0). .6 seconds) is longer. In this way, the reason why the blinking cycle of each display unit 831 to 834 is set longer than the count-up display time of the cumulative prize balls is that the count-up display of the cumulative prize balls is a count-up display by a general player. The display time is set on the premise that it can be recognized, and when this count-up display time is considered as a guideline for switching the display, the blinking cycle is set longer than this count-up display time. By doing so, it means that it is possible to reliably recognize that each display unit 831 to 834 is blinking.

In the above embodiment, the update cycle of the display data (lighting data, extinguishing data) of the identification seg 830a is every 0.3 seconds, and the update cycle of the display data of the ratio seg 830b is every 0.6 seconds. This update cycle can be appropriately set, and the update cycle of the display data of the ratio segment 830b may be the same as the update cycle of the display data of the identification segment 830a.

≪Relationship between base value display switching time and game ball launch time≫
Further, in the present embodiment, in the performance display monitor 830, the display of the base value is the display of the base value of the current section → the display of the base value of the previous section → the display of the base value of the section two times before →. It is designed to switch every predetermined display switching time (4.8 seconds), such as displaying the base value three times before, but this base value display switching time (4.8 seconds) is once. It is set to be shorter than the time required to launch a game ball for a specified count number (10 counts) in the round game of. Specifically, the rate of fire of the game ball is set up to 100 shots per minute, and the firing time of the game ball for the specified count number of minutes (10 counts) is "6 seconds (10 counts x 60 seconds ÷)". 100 shots) ”. As a result, the display switching time (4.8 seconds) of the base value is shorter than the firing time (6 seconds) of the game ball for the specified count number. According to this configuration, during the execution of the jackpot game, the display of the base value can be switched until the end of one round game, so that the total out is assumed during the execution of the one round game. Even if the value of the number counter reaches 60,000 (even if the current measurement section ends and the next measurement section is started), the switching status is recognized during the execution of one round game. Can be done.

The effect button 15 in the present embodiment is configured so that the effect button itself can vibrate or the movable object inside the effect button 15 can be rotated by the internal mechanism of the effect button. In this way, the effect button 15 not only changes the effect content displayed on the effect display device 70 by the player's operation, but also suggests a jackpot expectation to the player by the operation of the effect button 15 itself. It is configured to be able to notify. Such an operation of the effect button 15 is referred to as an effect button operation.

This effect button operation can be executed during the variable display or the jackpot game, and is executed when suggesting or notifying that the jackpot expectation is very high during the variable display (for example, the effect display device 70). Is executed in association with the execution of the specific advance notice effect executed in, or is suddenly executed regardless of the execution of such a specific advance notice effect), and if the jackpot game is in progress, the above-mentioned promotion effect or hold It may be executed in association with the execution of the Uchirenso production.

More specifically, if the variable display is in progress, the effect button operation is the next preview effect (suggesting future effect development), which is a specific advance notice effect executed in the middle of the variable display (before the reach is established in the middle stage). Or, when the notice effect with high expectation of big hit to be notified is executed, the above-mentioned winning branch scene (the final result of SP reach) is executed in the middle of the fluctuation display (after the reach is established at the end stage). It is executed at the same time when the variable middle-sized character effect that notifies the big hit winning is executed (the effect button operation associated with the advance notice effect). It should be noted that, in one fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), both the next notice effect and the variable medium-sized character effect for notifying the big-hit winning are configured to be executed, but the variable medium-sized item for notifying the big-hit winning. It is configured so that the execution time of the effect button operation is longer when the effect is executed. It should be noted that the predetermined advance notice effect other than the specific advance notice effect (for example, the comment advance notice effect) is configured so that the effect button operation is not executed in association with the effect button operation. And the execution timing overlaps, and it may happen to be executed at the same time. In addition, as the look-ahead notice effect, the operation related to the high expectation fluctuation such that the operation holding ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect (for example, the variable middle-sized character effect for notifying the big hit winning in the above-mentioned next notice effect) can be executed. Operation that is digested before the hold ball) Immediately after the start of the fluctuation display related to the hold ball, the effect button operation as a look-ahead notice (the effect button operation at the start of change as look-ahead) is executed, which suddenly executes the effect button operation. If this is done, the effect button operation is not a look-ahead notice, but suggests a jackpot expectation of the change, even at the start of the change display related to the operation holding ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect that arrived via the look-ahead notice effect. It is executed as a notice effect to notify (operation of the effect button at the start of fluctuation via look-ahead). It should be noted that the variation start effect button operation as the look-ahead and the variation start effect button operation via the look-ahead are configured so that the execution time is shorter than the effect button operation associated with the above-mentioned advance notice effect. It should be noted that the effect button operation is completed during one variation display, and the execution is not continued across the variation display two or more times (for example, the certain variation display is performed from the final stage of the variation display). The vibration of the effect button 15 is not configured to continue until the beginning of the next fluctuation display of the fluctuation display). Further, if the jackpot game is in progress, it is associated and executed during the execution of the promotion effect or the pending villa effect, and is associated and executed during the execution of the above-mentioned jackpot middle character effect (). Production button operation during big hit). It should be noted that the effect button operation during the big hit is configured to be executable over a plurality of round games (for example, from the end of a certain number of round games to the next number of times of the certain number of round games). The vibration of the effect button 15 can be continued until the beginning of the round game).

Here, the effect button operation is roughly classified into one that is executed based on the operation of the effect button 15 by the player and one that is not executed based on the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. That is, it is roughly classified into those that are immediately executed by the operation of the effect button 15 by the player and those that do not require the operation of the effect button 15 by the player in the first place. The above-mentioned effect button operation during the jackpot and the effect button operation associated with the variable middle-sized character effect that notifies the jackpot winning are immediately executed by the operation of the effect button 15 by the player (in other words,). , By operating the effect button 15 by the player, a promotion effect, a hold inner staging effect, and a variable middle-aged character effect that notifies the jackpot winning are executed), and the above-mentioned change start effect button operation as a look-ahead. As for the effect button operation at the start of fluctuation via look-ahead, and the effect button operation associated with the next advance notice effect, the operation of the effect button 15 by the player is executed without any need in the first place (in other words, the effect by the player). The operation of the effect button at the start of fluctuation, the operation of the effect button at the start of fluctuation via look-ahead, and the next advance notice effect are executed without the need to operate the button 15). Here, as a modification, even if the effect button 15 is operated by the player despite the jackpot variation display, the variable middle character effect for notifying the jackpot winning is not executed and is associated with it. It may have a case where it is not executed by the effect button operation (when it suggests that it is a deviation in the scene of the winning branch), and in such a case, it is a deviation in the scene of the winning branch in the same fluctuation display. It may be configured to indicate or notify that it is a big hit by displaying the character "Resurrection!" At a timing after the timing suggesting that there is. When configured in this way, the effect button operation is executed even during the effect (also referred to as the revival effect or the reverse effect) in which the characters are displayed as "Resurrection!", And this effect button operation is produced by the player. The operation of the button 15 is configured to be executed without any need in the first place.

Further, when the effect button operation is executed, the frame lamp 10 and the above-mentioned accessory lamp are configured to emit light in a specific mode. It should be noted that the light emitting mode (light emitting color) is configured to differ depending on the effect situation when the effect button operation is executed. Specifically, when a promotion effect, a pending staging effect, a variable middle-aged character effect or a resurrection effect that informs a big hit is executed, it emits a rainbow color, and the effect button operation at the start of the change or the change via look-ahead It is configured to emit blue light when the start effect button operation and the next notice effect are executed. However, in any case, if an error occurs during the emission of rainbow colors or blue by the operation of the effect button, the emission is always switched to red.

Further, when the selection operation for shifting to the RAM clear mode or the game mode is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the effect button operation is executed after the power is turned on as an operation check, not as an effect after the power is turned on. The effect button operation in this case is executed in a relatively short time (executed in a shorter time than the effect button operation associated with the variable intermediate character effect that notifies the winning), and the frame lamp 10 and the above-mentioned The accessory lamp is also emitted in red. In addition, when the variable display starts during the effect button operation, a button image prompting the player to operate the button may be displayed, but even during the effect button operation, the button operation may be displayed. By performing the above, it is possible to change the effect display on the effect display device 70 (for example, by operating the button, the button image is erased and the comment notice effect is displayed). If a selection operation for shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the effect button operation for operation confirmation is not performed after the power is turned on. This makes it possible to omit the effect button operation as an operation check. As a modification, the effect button operation as an operation check may be executed by ending the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

As described above, the main effects achieved in the fourth embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the fourth embodiment, when the first hit occurs at an early stage (section A in which the total number of outs is less than 299) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is first turned on, it is determined during the execution of the jackpot game. By being able to acquire more than the number of prize balls (299), the game shifts to the next section (section B) while the acquired game balls are being launched (until the game balls on hand are exhausted). Since the display of the base value (real-time display) can be made to function, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts (whether there is an abnormality in the ball ejection performance) at an early stage, and to realize an appropriate evaluation of the game performance. Is possible.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, even if the gaming state is the same low base state, the necessity of measurement is appropriately determined depending on whether or not the gaming state is a special game. By making it possible to execute operations for updating the base value from the initial display period (full blinking display period) after the power is turned on, it is possible to properly manage the base value from the early stage after the power is turned on. This makes it possible to realize an appropriate evaluation of game performance.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the big hit game due to the occurrence of the prize ball error are in the normal game state thereafter based on the cancellation of the prize ball error. By excluding the number of prize balls from the target of updating the base value, it is possible to properly manage the base value, thereby realizing appropriate evaluation of game performance. It becomes possible to do.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, the payout of the prize ball is restricted for the unexpected winning in the setting confirmation mode, and the player for the winning in the big hit game restarted after the end of the setting confirmation mode. While giving priority to the acquisition of the actual profit of the prize ball, the payout of the prize ball is restricted, and the effect display triggered by the payout of the prize ball is restricted so as not to give a disadvantage to the player. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the machine.

Further, according to the fourth embodiment, if the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls in the big hit game, it is confirmed whether the transition mode at the time of returning from the power off is the setting change mode. Depending on the mode, the appropriate prize ball payout restriction measures suitable for the transition mode are executed, and if the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball payout is performed when the jackpot game is restarted thereafter. By removing the restriction measures of the above and continuously restricting the display of the effect triggered by the payout of the prize ball, the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced while not giving a disadvantage to the player. Will be possible

[Modification example]
Next, a modification of the first to fourth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machines of the first to fourth embodiments described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration. The explanation is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, a normal probabilistic gaming machine that determines the presence / absence of the probabilistic transition based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol is adopted. It is not limited, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, it is judged whether or not there is a probability change transition depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the big hit game. A probabilistic gaming machine may be adopted. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, a probabilistic gaming state given as a trigger of a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, up to a preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times). Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive latent gaming states may be adopted. Further, in the first embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probabilistic gaming machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game to the occurrence of the next jackpot, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is defined. It may be configured as a probability-changing gaming machine (number-cutting probability-changing machine, ST machine) that continuously operates for the number of STs (for example, 100 times). On the contrary, in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probabilistic gaming machine (number-cutting probability variation machine, ST machine) that continuously operates for a specified ST number of times, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is provided. It may be configured as a probabilistic gaming machine that continues from the end of the big hit game to the occurrence of the next big hit.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a model having only one large winning opening in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model having a plurality of large winning openings in the game area is applied. You may. In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V-probability changing gaming machine is provided with a specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability fluctuation function of a special symbol. It may be equipped with two or more large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area). As an example of the board layout, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or horizontally side by side in the right side area of the game area, or the first large winning opening may be arranged. The board surface area to be created and the board surface area in which the second large winning opening is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out when the game ball enters the first big prize opening and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning opening. The number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) may be the same or different. Of the two big winning openings, the first major winning opening (or the second major winning opening) is for the big winning opening for small hit games, and the second big winning opening (or the first big winning opening) is for big hit games. It may be configured as a big winning opening. In that case, even if the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize opening for small hit games is 10, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize openings for big hit games is 15. good.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability changing gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability change gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which only the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated and the fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are not activated. You may. In addition, the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is divided into the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the latent probability variation game state is divided into the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the first. 2 It may be defined as a gaming state in which the variable time shortening function of the special symbol is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time) It may operate independently of the shortening function).

Next, in order to make it easier to clearly understand the technical significance of the embodiments and modifications, the problems corresponding to the embodiments and modifications will be outlined.

It is known that conventional pachinko gaming machines perform a large prize opening prize production (for example, prize ball number display and sound effect output) when a game ball enters the large winning opening during a special game. (See, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-123602").

However, since many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is required to further improve the fun of the game in order to differentiate from the conventional models.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, during the execution of a special game, the number of executions of the round game currently being executed in the special game being executed and the number of rounds of the currently being executed round game are notified. Is known (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-125303").

However, since many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is required to further improve the fun of the game in order to differentiate from the conventional models.

In addition, the conventional pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a performance display device that displays the performance information of the game obtained by measuring the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area and the number of prize balls given to the player. Is known (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-186936").

However, many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, and there is room for further improvement in order to realize an appropriate evaluation of gaming performance.

Further, a conventional pachinko gaming machine is known to be equipped with a function (so-called setting function) for setting a winning probability in which the result of a winning / failing determination is a big hit (for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-20605"). reference).

However, many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, and there is room for further improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load of the gaming machine.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above embodiment and the modified example, the above-mentioned configuration is adopted for the purpose of further improvement, and the above-mentioned action and effect are achieved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and modifications, and can be appropriately improved as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. In addition, each component described in the above-described embodiment and modification is appropriately combined, or a part of each component described in the above-described embodiment and modification is deleted or converted by a well-known / conventional technique or the like. Also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko Game Machine PA Game Area 1 Outer Frame 2 Front Frame 5 Glass Frame 10 Frame Lamp 20 Game Board 24 Movable Accessory 27 Main Control Display Device 51 First Starting Port 52 Second Starting Port 53 Operating Gate 54 Large Winning Door 64 General Winning opening 70 Production display device 71 1st special symbol display device 72 2nd special symbol display device 77 Round indicator light 100 Main control board 103A Game control information storage area 103B Setting value information storage area 103C Performance information storage area 200 Production control board 220 Direction control means 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board 810 Setting key switch 820 RAM clear switch 830 Performance display monitor 830a Identification seg 830b Ratio seg 891 Gamed ball detection switch 892 Frame open switch 1030 Total out number counter 1031 Normal time Out number counter 1032 Normal prize ball number counter 1033 Base information storage area

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port, which is provided at a position different from the first starting port in the game area and changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter.
The first hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port,
The second hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / fail judgment triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port,
A large winning opening provided in the game area, which is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means, and allows the game ball to enter.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss determination means or the result of the hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss determination means is a big hit, the special game execution means capable of executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the special game execution means.
It has a normal ball entry state and a ball entry easy state in which the ease of entering the second starting port is higher than that of the normal ball entry state, and the normal ball entry state or the ball entry easy state can be set. Executable ball entry state control means and
A performance display device that displays specific information, and
Equipped with an effect display device that displays the effect display
It is possible to detect a game ball discharged from the game area,
The first counting process for counting the total number of ejected balls, which is the total number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming area in all the gaming states, and
A second counting process for counting the number of normally ejected balls, which is the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area in the normal entering state under a predetermined situation,
It is possible to execute a third counting process for counting the number of prize balls in the normal time, which is the total number of prize balls paid out in the normal entry state under a predetermined situation.
It is possible to measure the base value that indicates the ratio of the number of prize balls during normal time to the number of balls discharged during normal time.
The performance display device displays a base value information display unit that displays base value information that can specify the base value, and identification information for identifying the type of base value information displayed on the base value information display unit. Has an identification information display unit
During the execution of the special game, the cumulative prize ball number display, which is a display showing the cumulative value of the prize ball number given to the player, can be updated and displayed when the game ball enters the large prize opening. ,
When the cumulative value of the number of prize balls reaches a specific value during the execution of the special game, the display corresponding to the specific value indicating that the cumulative value of the number of prize balls has reached the specific value is displayed. Can be displayed separately from
During the execution of the special game, a predetermined error occurs in which the payout of the prize ball is temporarily suspended while the payout of the prize ball is being performed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening. If the predetermined error continues until the normal entry state that shifts after the end of the easy entry state that shifts after the end of the special game, and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal entry state, the predetermined error is resolved. While it is possible to pay out the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the special game due to the occurrence of an error after the predetermined error in the normal ball entry state is resolved.
While the special game is being executed, the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs while the prize ball is being paid out when the game ball enters the large winning opening, and the entry shifts after the end of the special game. If the predetermined error continues until the normal ball entry state that shifts after the end of the ball easy state and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball entry state, the special error occurs. Even if there are prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the game, the cumulative prize ball number display can be updated and displayed during the execution of the special game and after the predetermined error occurs, and a specific value. Correspondence display can also be displayed,
While the special game is being executed, the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs while the prize ball is being paid out when the game ball enters the large winning opening, and the entry shifts after the end of the special game. The predetermined error continues until the normal ball entry state that shifts after the end of the ball easy state, and then the predetermined error is resolved in the normal ball entry state, so that the predetermined error occurs. If the prize balls that were not paid out during the execution of the special game are paid out after the predetermined error is resolved in the normal entry state, the prize balls will not be paid out until the predetermined error is resolved. The base value is not measured when the prize balls are paid out, but the special game that triggered the generation of the prize balls that were not paid out until the predetermined error was resolved. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the total number of ejected balls can be counted when the gaming ball is ejected based on the entry of the gaming ball into the large winning opening during execution.

Images